3-878-038-12(1)
Solid-State Memory
Camcorder
PMW-EX3
Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly
and retan it for future reference.
Printed in Japan
© 2008 Sony Corporation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
manual could void your authority to operate
this equipment.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock,
do not expose this apparatus to rain or
moisture.
To avoid electrical shock, do not open the
cabinet. Refer servicing to qualified
personnel only.
All interface cables used to connect
peripherals must be shielded in order to
comply with the limits for a digital device
pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC
Rules.
WARNING
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
When installing the unit, incorporate a readily
accessible disconnect device in the fixed
wiring, or connect the power plug to an easily
accessible socket-outlet near the unit. If a
fault should occur during operation of the
unit, operate the disconnect device to switch
the power supply off, or disconnect the power
plug.
For the customers in Canada
This Class A digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
Do not install the appliance in a confined
space, such as book case or built-in cabinet.
For the customers in Europe
IMPORTANT
This product with the CE marking complies
with both the EMC Directive and the Low
Voltage Directive issued by the Commission
of the European Community.
The nameplate is located on the bottom.
WARNING
Excessive sound pressure from earphones
and headphones can cause hearing loss.
In order to use this product safely, avoid
prolonged listening at excessive sound
pressure levels.
Compliance with these directives implies
conformity to the following European
standards:
• EN60065 : Product Safety (AC adaptor)
• EN55103-1 : Electromagnetic Interference
(Emission)
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive
heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
• EN55103-2:ElectromagneticSusceptibility
(Immunity)
This product is intended for use in the
following Electromagnetic Environments:
E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light
industrial), E3 (urban outdoors), E4
(controlled EMC environment, ex. TV studio)
For the customers in the U.S.A.
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated
in a commercial environment. This
The manufacturer of this product is Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo,
Japan.
The Authorized Representative for EMC and
product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH,
Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327 Stuttgart,
Germany. For any service or guarantee
matters please refer to the addresses given
in separate service or guarantee documents.
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the
For the State of California, USA only
Perchlorate Material - special handling may
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
interference at his own expense.
You are cautioned that any changes or
modifications not expressly approved in this
hazardouswaste/perchlorate
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Perchlorate Material : Lithium battery
contains perchlorate.
IMPORTANT
La plaque signalétique se situe sous
l’appareil.
For the customers in the USA and Canada
RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES
Lithium-Ion batteries are recyclable.
You can help preserve our environment by
returning your used rechargeable batteries to
the collection and recycling location nearest
you.
For more information regarding recycling of
rechargeable batteries, call toll free 1-800-
822-8837, or visit
AVERTISSEMENT
Une pression acoustique excessive en
provenance des écouteurs ou du casque
peut provoquer une baisse de l'acuité
auditive.
Pour utiliser ce produit en toute sécurité,
évitez l'écoute prolongée à des pressions
sonores excessives.
AVERTISSEMENT
http://www.rbrc.org/
N’exposez pas les batteries à une chaleur
excessive, au soleil ou près d’un feu par
exemple.
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking
Lithium-Ion batteries.
Pour les clients au Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Pour les clients en Europe
Ce produit portant la marque CE est
conforme à la fois à la Directive sur la
compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC) et à
la Directive sur les basses tensions émises
par la Commission de la Communauté
Européenne.
For the customers in Taiwan only
La conformité à ces directives implique la
conformité aux normes européennes
suivantes :
• EN60065 : Sécurité des produits
(Adaptateur secteur)
AVERTISSEMENT
Afin de réduire les risques d’incendie ou
d’électrocution, ne pas exposer cet
appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité.
Afin d’écarter tout risque d’électrocution,
garder le coffret fermé. Ne confier
l’entretien de l’appareil qu’à un personnel
qualifié.
• EN55103-1 : Interférences
électromagnétiques (émission)
• EN55103-2 : Sensibilité électromagnétique
(immunité)
Ce produit est prévu pour être utilisé dans les
environnements électromagnétiques
suivants :
E1 (résidentiel), E2 (commercial et industrie
légère), E3 (urbain extérieur) et E4
(environnement EMC contrôlé, ex. studio de
télévision).
AVERTISSEMENT
Lors de l’installation de l’appareil, incorporer
un dispositif de coupure dans le câblage fixe
ou brancher la fiche d’alimentation dans une
prise murale facilement accessible proche de
l’appareil. En cas de problème lors du
fonctionnement de l’appareil, enclencher le
dispositif de coupure d’alimentation ou
débrancher la fiche d’alimentation.
Le fabricant de ce produit est Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo,
Japon.
Le représentant autorisé pour EMC et la
sécurité des produits est Sony Deutschland
GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327
Stuttgart, Allemagne. Pour toute question
concernant le service ou la garantie, veuillez
consulter les adresses indiquées dans les
Ne pas installer l’appareil dans un endroit
confiné, par exemple une bibliothèque ou un
placard encastré.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
documents de service ou de garantie
séparés.
WICHTIG
Das Namensschild befindet sich auf der
Unterseite des Gerätes.
Pour les utilisateurs aux Etats-Unis et au
Canada.
WARNUNG
Zu hoher Schalldruck von Ohrhörern und
Kopfhörern kann Gehörschäden
verursachen.
Um dieses Produkt sicher zu verwenden,
vermeiden Sie längeres Hören bei sehr
hohen Schalldruckpegeln.
RECYCLAGE DES ACCUMULATEURS AUX
IONS DE LITHIUM
Les accumulateurs aux ions de lithium sont
recyclables.
Vous pouvez contribuer à préserver
l’environnement en rapportant les piles
usées dans un point de collection et
recyclage le plus proche.
WARNUNG
Akkus dürfen keinesfalls übermäßiger
Wärmeeinwirkung ausgesetzt werden, wie
z.B. Sonneneinstrahlung, Feuer o. ä.
Pour plus d’informations sur le recyclage des
accumulateurs, téléphonez le numéro gratuit
1-800-822-8837 (Etats-Unis et Canada
uniquement), ou visitez http://www.rbrc.org/
Avertissment: Ne pas utiliser des
accumulateurs aux ions de lithium qui sont
endommagées ou qui fuient..
Für Kunden in Europa
Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE-
Kennzeichnung und erfüllt die EMV-
Richtlinie sowie die
Niederspannungsrichtlinie der EG-
Kommission.
Angewandte Normen:
• EN60065 : Sicherheitsbestimmungen
(Netzgerät)
• EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit (Störaussendung)
• EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit (Störfestigkeit)
Für die folgenden elektromagnetischen
Umgebungen:
E1 (Wohnbereich), E2 (kommerzieller und in
beschränktem Maße industrieller Bereich),
E3 (Stadtbereich im Freien) und E4
(kontrollierter EMV-Bereich, z.B.
Fernsehstudio).
WARNUNG
Um die Gefahr von Bränden oder
elektrischen Schlägen zu verringern, darf
dieses Gerät nicht Regen oder
Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden.
Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu
vermeiden, darf das Gehäuse nicht
geöffnet werden. Überlassen Sie
Wartungsarbeiten stets nur qualifiziertem
Fachpersonal.
WARNUNG
Der Hersteller dieses Produkts ist Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo,
Japan.
Beim Einbau des Geräts ist daher im
Festkabel ein leicht zugänglicher
Unterbrecher einzufügen, oder der
Netzstecker muss mit einer in der Nähe des
Geräts befindlichen, leicht zugänglichen
Wandsteckdose verbunden werden. Wenn
während des Betriebs eine Funktionsstörung
auftritt, ist der Unterbrecher zu betätigen
bzw. der Netzstecker abzuziehen, damit die
Stromversorgung zum Gerät unterbrochen
wird.
Der autorisierte Repräsentant für EMV und
Produktsicherheit ist Sony Deutschland
GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327
Stuttgart, Deutschland. Bei jeglichen
Angelegenheiten in Bezug auf Kundendienst
oder Garantie wenden Sie sich bitte an die in
den separaten Kundendienst- oder
Garantiedokumenten aufgeführten
Anschriften.
Das Gerät nicht an Orten aufstellen, z.B. in
Bücherregalen oder Einbauschränken, wo
keine ausreichende Belüftung gewährleistet
ist.
Für Kunden in Deutschland
Entsorgungshinweis: Bitte werfen Sie nur
entladene Batterien in die Sammelboxen
beim Handel oder den Kommunen. Entladen
sind Batterien in der Regel dann, wenn das
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gerät abschaltet und signalisiert „Batterie
leer“ oder nach längerer Gebrauchsdauer
der Batterien „nicht mehr einwandfrei
funktioniert“. Um sicherzugehen, kleben Sie
die Batteriepole z.B. mit einem Klebestreifen
ab oder geben Sie die Batterien einzeln in
einen Plastikbeutel.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the Remaining Time Available for
Recording ............................................................... 46
Checking the Remaining Time Available for
Recording ............................................................... 48
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Registering the Customized Settings as a Picture
Profile ..................................................................... 88
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording the Camcorder Picture on an External
Device .................................................................. 135
Functions Operable From the RM-B750/B150 (Camera
Mode) ................................................................... 142
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Package Configuration
Make sure you have following items supplied with your camcorder.
The number in parentheses indicates the number of that item supplied.
Component video cable (1)
VCL-614B2X exclusive standard zoom lens
(1)
Y
T
O
D
A
E
T
S
1 . 9
H
S
2 . 8
4
BP-U30 battery pack (1)
ll
M
u
F
F
5 . 6
F
A
8
m
f t
O
T
m
U
A
U
N
A
M
6
1
O
R
0
3
1 0
C
A
M
C
5
5
1
N
O
F
F
O
3
0
1
S
U
C
O
F
2
7
B
P
-
S
3
0
O
T
U
A
It is attached to the camcorder at the factory.
Lens hood with lens Lens adaptor (1)
cap (1)
BC-U1 battery charger (1)
D
C
O
U
T
C
H
A
R
G
E
For a lens of 2 kg (4 lb 6
oz) or less.
0
%
B
B
C
8
0
A
T
-U
T
E
1
R
Y
1
0
C
H
0
A
R
G
E
R
Infrared Remote
Commander (1)
It is attached to the
camcorder at the factory.
Shoulder strap (1)
PUSH SET
1
SHOTMARK
2
T
ZOOM
W
THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP
PREV
PLAY/PAUSE
NEXT
STOP
.
u
>
x
FREV
FFWD
m
M
REC
REC PAUSE
PUSH AF
z
X
Cheek pad (1)
Eyepiece (1)
Eyecup (1)
It is attached to the
eyepiece at the factory.
USB cable (1)
Package Configuration
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lens mount cap (1)
Lens cap for the supplied lens (1)
Fixing screws for the cheek pad (3)
Features
DC cable clamp and fixing screw (1 each)
Bottom plate (1) and fixing screws (2)
Lithium battery (CR2032 for backup) (1)
It is mounted in the camcorder at the factory.
Lithium battery (CR2025 for the IR Remote
Commander) (1)
The PMW-EX3 is a highly compact and high-
1)
performance XDCAM EX camcorder that uses
1)
SxS memory cards, as its recording medium.
The imaging devices used in the PMW-EX3
It is mounted in the IR Remote Commander at the
factory.
1
camcorder are three / -inch type CMOS sensors,
2
each with an effective pixel count of 1920 × 1080,
CD-ROM:
which produce images in full HD resolution.
Utility Software for Solid-State Memory
Camcorder and Recorder (XDCAM EX Clip
Browsing Software, SxS Device Driver
Software) (1)
A New Generation of HD Recording
System
Manuals for Solid-State Memory Camcorder
(Operating Instructions in PDF) (1)
Operating Instructions (This manual) (1)
SxS Device Driver Software End-User
License Agreement (1)
New nonlinear recording media
Using SxS memory cards, the PMW-EX3 offers
nonlinear capabilities such as instant random
access and file-based operation.
HD recording using the “MPEG-2 Long GOP”
codec
The PMW-EX3 records 1920 × 1080 HD images
using “MPEG-2 Long GOP” codec compression.
This mature “MPEG-2 Long GOP” codec, which
1)
2)
is also adopted in the XDCAM HD and HDV
1080i series of products, enables you to record
stunning-quality HD video and audio with long
recording time by efficiently compressing the
data.
Selectable bit rates
The PMW-EX3 offers a choice of bit rates: either
35 Mbps (HQ mode) or 25 Mbps (SP mode),
depending on the desired picture quality and
recording time.
Long recording time
By utilizing an efficient compression format, the
PMW-EX3 records high-quality HD images for
long recording time of approx. 100 minutes in HQ
mode (35 Mbps VBR) or approx. 140 minutes in
SP mode (25 Mbps CBR) on a single 32-GB SxS
memory card. Equipped with two SxS memory
card slots, the PMW-EX3 makes transition
seamless without any frame loss, when recording
is done across two cards.
Multiple-format recording
The PMW-EX3 camcorder offers a wide array of
recording formats for multiple content creation
applications. The scanning mode is switchable
among 1920 × 1080, 1280 × 720, and 1440 ×
Features
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1080 resolutions. Frame rate is also selectable
from interlace and progressive (59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 25P, and native 23.98P). In addition,
59.94P and 50P progressive recording is available
in 1280 × 720 mode. SxS memory cards can
simultaneously hold multiple files of any of these
recording formats, allowing for flexible use of the
memory cards.
Newly developed lens mount
The PMW-EX3 employs a new lens mount (1/2-
inch EX Mount) of superior optical
characteristics in a compact size, which permits
the supplied standard zoom lens and an optionally
available lens specifically designed for the PMW-
EX3 to be mounted.
For use of a conventional Sony 1/2-inch Bayonet
Mount lenses, a lens adaptor is provided as a
supplied accessory.
High-quality uncompressed audio recording
In addition to HD video recording, the PMW-
EX3 can record and play back high-quality, two-
channel 16-bit, 48-kHz linear PCM
VCL-614B2X high-performance zoom lens
(supplied)
uncompressed audio.
The PMW-EX3 is equipped with a zoom lens
specifically designed for the camcorder, to offer
optimum shooting performance. Independent
rings for zoom, focus, and iris adjustment give the
user a high level of smooth operational control.
The lens has versatile functions for easy and
precise focus adjustments.
IT friendly
The file-based recording in MP4 format allows
material to be handled with great flexibility in an
IT-based environment, easily available for
copying, transferring, sharing, and archiving.
For immediate recording start
• One-push Auto Focus
In recording on flash memory cards, the XDCAM
EX system makes each new recording on an
empty area of the card. This is extremely
convenient, as the camera operator need not
worry about accidentally recording over good
takes or search through footage for the correct
position to start the next recording.
• MF Assist
• Optical Image Stabilizer (Steady Shot)
Creative Recording Modes and Settings
23.98P native recording
The PMW-EX3 camcorder, a new member of
Sony’s legendary CineAlta family, though
compact offers native 23.98P recording
capability.
1)
Instant-access thumbnail display with “Expand”
function
Each time a recording is started and stopped on
the XDCAM EX camcorder, the video and audio
signals are recorded as one clip.
Furthermore, thumbnails are automatically
generated for each clip as a visual reference,
allowing the operator to cue-up to a desired scene
simply by guiding the cursor to a thumbnail. For
further convenience, the ‘Expand’ function
allows one selected clip in the Thumbnail display
to be divided into 12 equal time intervals, each
with its own thumbnail identifier. This is useful if
you wish to quickly search for a particular scene
within a lengthy clip.
Slow & Quick Motion function
The PMW-EX3 offers a Slow & Quick Motion
function, commonly known as overcranking and
undercranking in film shooting, which enables
you to create unique ‘looks’ or special effects of
slow- and fast-motion images.
Slow Shutter function
The PMW-EX3 offers a Slow Shutter function for
capturing clear images in low-light environments.
This allows the shutter speed to be changed to a
maximum of 64-frame accumulation period.
Selectable gamma curves
The PMW-EX3 provides various types of gamma
identical to those of other CineAlta camcorders.
Cutting-edge Camera Technologies
1
1)
/ -inch type three “Exmor” CMOS sensors
2
Interval Recording function
The PMW-EX3 is equipped with three newly
The PMW-EX3 offers an Interval Recording
function that intermittently records signals at pre-
determined intervals. This is convenient for
shooting over long periods of time and also when
creating pictures with special effects of extremely
quick motion.
1
developed / -inch “Exmor” CMOS Sensors,
2
which deliver excellent picture performance with
full HD resolution.
Features
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frame Recording function
• Operations from the optional Remote Control
Units: The camcorder can be operated from the
RM-B750/B150 Remote Control Unit.
Frame Recording is a unique feature of the PMW-
EX3 camcorder that is especially useful for clay-
animation shooting. With this function, images
for pre-determined frame are recorded each time
the record button is pressed.
1)Sony, XDCAM, XDCAM EX, SxS, i.LINK, Exmor,
CineAlta, and Remote Commander are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
2)HDV is a trademark of Sony Corporation and Victor
Company of Japan, Limited.
Shutter-angle settings
In addition to the electric shutter speed controls,
the PMW-EX3 also has a “shutter angle” control,
which is familiar to cinematographers.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
Picture Profile feature
The Picture Profile feature allows the camera
operator to easily call up customized picture-
tonal settings to suit particular shooting
conditions.
XDCAM EX web sites
For information on XDCAM EX, visit the
following web sites:
Shot Transition function
United States
The Shot Transition function allows for smooth
automatic scene transitions. The operator can
program start and end settings for zoom, focus,
and white balance into the A and B buttons, and
with a press of the Start button a smooth transition
will take place according to the set time.
http://www.sony.com/xdcamex
Canada
http://www.sony.ca/xdcamex
Europe, Middle East, Africa, and Russia
http://www.sonybiz.net/xdcamex
Latin America
http://www.sonypro-latin.com/xdcamex
A variety of functions and designs for
high operability
Australia
www.sony.com.au/xdcamex
• Color viewfinder incorporated with a 3.5-inch
color LCD inside: Flipping up the eyepiece, you
can also operate the camcorder while directly
viewing the LCD.
• Expanded Focus
• Peaking
Asia (except Korea, China, and Japan)
http://pro.sony.com.hk
Korea
http://bp.sony.co.kr/xdcamex
• Depth-of-field indicator
• Brightness-level display
China
http://pro.sony.com.cn/minisite/XDCAMEX
• Histogram indicator
• Four assignable buttons
Japan
http://www.sony.co.jp/XDCAMEX
• Zoom and recording start/stop operations
enabled both on the handle and the grip
• Long operating time with a battery pack
• Wide array of interfaces, including USB and
1)
i.LINK
• ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)
• Built-in ND filter wheel
• Selectable gain
• High-speed picture search: ×4, ×15
• Freeze Mix function
1)
• IR Remote Commander supplied
• Input/output connectors for external
synchronization
Features
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read the documents
Using the CD-ROM
Do the following:
1
Insert the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM
drive.
Two CD-ROMs are supplied with the PMW-
EX3.
A cover page appears automatically in your
browser.
If it does not appear automatically in the
browser, double-click on the index.htm file
on the CD-ROM.
The CD-ROM labeled “Manuals for Solid-State
Memory Camcorder” contains the Operating
Instructions for the PMW-EX3 (Japanese,
English, French, German, Italian, Spanish and
Chinese) in PDF format.
2
Select and click on the manual that you
wish to read.
This opens the PDF file.
The CD-ROM labelled “Utility Software for
Solid-State Memory Camcorder and Recorder”
contains the following software:
Memo
The files may not be displayed properly,
depending on the version of Adobe Reader. In
such a case, install the latest version you can
download from the URL mentioned in
“Preparations” above.
SxS Device Driver Software
Driver for using SxS memory cards with a
computer having an ExpressCard slot.
Information on installation of the software is
included in the ReadMe (Japanese, English,
French, German, Italian, Spanish, and Chinese) in
PDF format.
Note
If you have lost or damaged the CD-ROM, you
can purchase a new one to replace it. Contact your
Sony service representative.
XDCAM EX Clip Browsing Software
Application program for operating clips recorded
with XDCAM EX-series models on a computer.
Information on installation and operations of the
software is included in the User’s Guide
(Japanese, English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish, and Chinese) in PDF format.
System Requirements for Using
the Applications
The following operating conditions are
recommended for using the software recorded on
the CD-ROM:
Reading the CD-ROM Manuals
Preparations
SxS Device Driver Software
Applicable hardware
Computer conforming to ExpressCard/34 or
ExpressCard/54
The following program must be installed on your
computer in order to read the operation manuals
contained on the CD-ROM.
OS
Adobe Reader Version 6.0 or higher
Microsoft Windows XP SP2 or later, Microsoft
Windows Vista, or Mac OS X v10.4.9 or later
Memo
If Adobe Reader is not installed, you can
download it from the following URL:
For support information on the driver, refer to the
following URL:
http://www.adobe.com/
http://www.sony.net/SxS-Support/
Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other
countries.
Using the CD-ROM
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XDCAM EX Clip Browsing Software
Uninstalling an application program
OS
Windows computer
Microsoft Windows XP SP3 or later (32-bit
version), Microsoft Windows Vista SP1 or later
(32-bit version), or Mac OS X v10.4.11 or later/
v10.5.1 or later.
Choose “Start,” “Control Panel” then “Add or
Remove Programs” and specify the program to be
deleted.
Macintosh computer
CPU
Drop the folder of the software (default:
/Application/XDCAM EX Clip Browser) into
Trash.
Windows: Intel Pentium 4 2.0 GHz or higher
(Intel Core 2 Duo Processor 2.0 GHz or
higher is recommended.)
Macintosh: Intel Core 2 Duo Processor 2.0 GHz
or higher (Intel Core 2 Duo Processor 2.4
GHz or higheris recommended.)
Memory
1 GB (2 GB or more is recommended.)
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are
registered trademarks and/or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• Intel Core and Pentium are trademarks of Intel
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc.
registered in the U.S States and other countries.
Software Installation
Do the following to install the software on the
CD-ROM on your computer:
1
Insert the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM
drive.
A cover page appears automatically in your
browser.
If it does not appear automatically in the
browser, double-click on the index.htm file
on the CD-ROM.
2
Select and click on the software that you
wish to install.
The installer for the software starts up.
Follow the displayed instructions:
For details, refer to the User’s Guide or ReadMe of
the software.
Using the CD-ROM
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts Identifications
Camcorder
1
2
Operation panel on the
handle(page 20)
3
5
6
7
8
R
L
E
C
N
A
R
C
O
IT
D
T
E
/S
L
W
N
O
F
O
V
F
M
L
E
E
S
S
T
X
L
AU
Y/P
PLA
IL
E
N
A
N
M
/
U
H
P
O
T
T
V
E
R
S
P
O
F
C
T
/S
E
V
R
T
E
R
R
A
P
T
S
D
L
O
H
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
H
SI
T
IO
O
T
B
N
9
81.2
TC
/U
-B
IT
/D
U
R
A
T
IO
ft
0
N
m
4
m
IR
IS
SDI OUT
9
.
5
1
2
E
N
S
IN
F
O
0
BR
T
0
D
IS
3
2.8
P
1
H
3
IS
M
TO
G
A
N
R
A
U
M
A
U
T
C
T
O
4
E
L
E
1
S
5
M
A
C
T
N
I
R
O
A
O
1
5
S
L
S
I
N
S
2
IG
N
6
T
LOCK
N
GE
.
X
E
1
5
O
T
U
A
L
A
U
3
S
AN
S
1 0
E
M
IO
C
D
I
8
.
8
C
U
A
A
B
O
F
F
1
N
-
H
C
5
O
N
IO
N
I
Rear connector panel
D
2
A
U
IN
A
S
T
TC
F
O
C
C
U
1
E
L
T
X
S
E
IO
V
E
D
E
U
L
A
TO
U
L
E
A
L
A
U
C
N
1
A
M
-
+
-2
TE
REMO
H
C
M
A
N
U
U
S
A
FU
L
L
E
P
U
TO
H
A
A
U
T
F
F
R
O
A
M
GAI
TC OUT
O
F
N
F
W
HITE BAL
4
L
B
A
R
S/C
M
H
A
T
A
W
M
-EX3
B
A
W
P
R
S
T
PM
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
S
E
L
/S
E
T
10
CA
N
CEL
P
IC
T
FILE
U
R
E
P
RO
C
A
M
E
R
A
O
FF
M
E
D
IA
Audio control block
Side operation panel (page 21)
Card slot block
(page 21)
12 11
For functions and usage, see the pages shown in
parentheses.
10. Shoulder pad
It can be pulled out as follows:
1. Cable clamp for external microphone
X
IO
V
S
E
D
E
U
L
O
T
A
L
U
A
E
L
A
U
N
A
M
-2
TE
REMO
H
C
TC OUT
-EX3
W
PM
N
E
P
O
3. Front accessory shoe
Attach an optional accessory, such as a video
light.
M
E
D
IA
5. Handle
Push in the knob at the bottom
to unlock.
Hold the knob depressed when
pulling out or pushing in the
pad.
8. Rear accessory shoe
Attach an optional accessory, such as the
PHU-60K Professional Hard Disk Unit (page
47).
Parts Identifications
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25
26
27
13
14
T
H
IG
R
Viewfinder control
panel (page 22)
B
T
F
S
A
R
T
N
O
C
A
R
G
B
E
I
N
Z
K
A
E
P
O
N
I
T
T
A
/B
Y
A
L
P
IS
D
E
G
A
IM
R
O
R
N
O
IR
M
F
F
O
O
F
F
L
H
15
16
l
P
R
j
H
E
O
V
R
F
L
D
E
V
s
L
S
T
28
29
30
31
S
T
H
T
G
P
U
L
M
S
/
A
R
Y
N
A
L
P
/
I L
A
U
S
E
M
J
S
E
O
N
L / S
I T
F
O
R
F
E
T
W
V
D
O
L
C
A
N
C
E
L
R
17
Upper operation
panel (page 21)
N
O
I
T
A
R
U
D
/
T
I
B -
U
/
C
T
C
H
-1
N
B
O
O
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
R
T
A
U
S
D
IO
IN
A
C
H
-2
M
IC
L
IN
E
S T
M
IC
S T
A R
O P
+4
8
V
M
IC
T /
L
IN
E
D
C
M
I
IC
+48
N
R E L E A S E
V
F O C U S
E X P
A
N
D E D
M
R E
O
V
18
19
20
R E C
I E
N
W
O
I
T
U
O
T
R
S
V
I
D
E
O
C
H
-1
AU
C
D
H-2
IO OUT
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
O
U
T
21
22
23
LOCK
Bottom (page 22)
24
RELEASE
Connectors 18 to 20 have indivial caps, and 21 to 23 are behind a shared cover.
13. Eyecup
The eyecup can be attached in the reversed
19. MONITOR OUT connector (BNC type)
direction.
To reattach the eyecup, stretch it a little to
attach to the viewfinder and fit the rim of the
eyecup into the groove of the viewfinder.
21. AUDIO OUT CH-1/CH-2 connectors
(RCA phono) (page 132)
22. COMPONENT OUT connector (Mini D)
14. Hooks for the shoulder strap (left and
right)
Attach the supplied shoulder strap as shown
below.
4
3
2
1
30. IR remote control receptor
31. AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors (XLR)
and input selection switches (page 71)
Parts Identifications
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation panel on the handle
Rear connector panel
The connectors are located under the respective
caps.
L
R
MONITOR
VOL
1
2
9
THUMBNAIL SEL/SET CANCEL
SDI OUT
HDV
10
11
3
4
F REV PLAY/PAUSE F FWD
j
PREV
l
G
/S
J
1
4
STOP
NEXT
L
s
12
13
5
6
GENLOCK IN
REC
START/STOP
TC IN
5
7
2
HOLD
REMOTE
14
TC OUT
6
H
L
OFF
3
8
1. i.LINK (HDV) connector (4-pin, S400
conforming to IEEE1394) (page 135)
2. TC IN (timecode input) connector (BNC
type) (page 138)
3. TC OUT (timecode output) connector
(BNC type) (page 139)
5. GENLOCK IN connector (BNC type)
10. SEL/SET (selection/set) button (Joystick)
It functions accordingly when you move it up
(forward), down (rearward), left, or right, or
you push along the axis.
Audio control block
Cover
It is called “the joystick” in the subsequent
operating instructions.
AUTO
MANUAL
INT
EXT
CH-1
AUDIO
LEVEL
AUDIO
SELECT
AUDIO
IN
AUTO
MANUAL
INT
EXT
CH-2
1
2
3
1. AUDIO LEVEL CH-1 /CH-2 controls
2. AUDIO SELECT (audio level control
mode selection) switches (page 71)
Parts Identifications
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. AUDIO IN (audio input selection)
switches (page 71)
5. WHITE BAL (white balance memory)
switch (page 54)
Front lower operation block
8. SEL/SET (selection/set) dial (Jog dial)
It functions accordingly when you turn it up
or down, or you push it horizontally.
It is called “the jog dial” in the subsequent
operating instructions.
WHT BAL
SHUTTER
ASSIGN 4
OFF
ON
9. MENU (menu display ON/OFF) button
1
2
3
Card slot block
3. WHT BAL (automatic white balance
adjustment) button (page 54)
1
2
Side operation panel
ACCESS
SLOT SELECT
A
B
LENS INFO BRT DISP HISTOGRAM
ASSIGN
1
1
2
3
ND
FILTER
OPEN
2
1
2
3
-
FULL AUTO
FRAME
+
3
4
Slide the cover upward
to unlock.
GAIN
L
WHITE BAL BARS/CAM
ATW
B
OFF
M
A
4
5
6
H
PRST
1. SLOT SELECT (SxS memory card select)
STATUS MENU
SEL/SET
CANCEL
button (page 45)
7
8
9
10
11
Upper operation panel
1
2
A
B
SHOT
TRANSITION
TC/U-BIT/DURATION
4. BARS/CAM (color bar/camera signal
switching) button (page 73)
Parts Identifications
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. SHOT TRANSITION operation block
When attaching to a tripod
Use the supplied bottom plate to stabilize the
camcorder. Remove two screws from the
bottom of the camcorder and attach the
bottom plate using the two supplied screws
(M2×6).
2. TC/U-BIT/DURATION (time data
Viewfinder control panel
1
2
3
Bottom plate
PEAKING
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
ZEBRA
M2×6 screws
MIRROR IMAGE DISPLAY/BATT INFO
OFF ON
5
4
6
Zoom Lens VCL-614B2X
(Supplied)
A
F
Fu
ll
S
T
2
E
AD
M
.
F
Y
1
S
H
O
8
T
t
f
0
4
m
m
IRIS
1.9
25
0
.8
0
3
2
1
M
A
N
U
A
U
T
O
4
1
2
5
MA
C
RO
1
5
6
.
10
5
0
3
1
8
.
8
O
F
F
5
O
N
F
O
C
16
U
S
C
M
AN
U
SH
AU
TO
PU
AF
Bottom
Controls on the grip
S T
S T
O P
A R
T /
R E L E A S E
F O
C U S
E X P
A N D E D
R E V I E W
R E C
Cover of the lens
control block (See
“Note” below.)
ZOOM
MANU SERVO
3
1
2
LENS
REMOTE
4
1. Tripod receptacles
Note
1. Lens hood
Check that the size of the hole matches the
screw of the tripod. If they do not match, the
camcorder cannot be attached to the tripod
securely.
Parts Identifications
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
Controls on the grip
The lens is properly adjusted at the factory. Do
not touch the controls of the lens control block.
1
2
3
4
To remove the lens hood
S
T O
S T
A R
P
T /
R
E L E A S E
F O
C U S
E X P
1 Loosen the hood fixing screw, 2 turn the
hood in the direction of the arrow, 3 then pull it
out.
A N D E D
R
E
V
I E
R
W
E
C
O
E
N
S
U
M
O
P
X
J
E
S
E
T
N
L
I T
F
E
S
/
O
R
F
T
W
V
D
O
C
L
A
N
C
E
L
R
5
CH
-1
N
O
O
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
S
R
T
A
UD
IO
IN
A
2
CH
-2
M
IC
LI
NE
S
M
IC
T
O
S
R
T
+4
8V
P
R
A
M
I
T
L
C
/
IN
E
M
IC
+4
8V
E
R
L
F
A
N
E
X
E
O
A
C
P
S
E
U
S
D
E
D
E
V
R
E
I E
W
C
1
3
Hood fixing screw
To reattach the hood, align the marks on the
hood with those on the camcorder, turn it in the
opposite direction from that when you removed it,
then tighten the fixing screw.
IR Remote Commander (Supplied)
Lens control block
The buttons without remarks can be used in the
same manner as the corresponding buttons on the
camcorder.
1
2
3
FULL
MF
STEADY
SHOT
AF
1
4
5
IRIS
2
PUSH SET
1
SHOTMARK
2
T
ZOOM
W
MANU AUTO
MACRO
9
10
11
6
7
3
4
5
6
OFF ON
FOCUS
THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP
PREV
PLAY/PAUSE
NEXT
STOP
.
u
>
x
FREV
FFWD
MANU AUTO
PUSH AF
m
M
REC
REC PAUSE
PUSH AF
12
13
z
X
8
7
8
1. ZOOM T/W (telephoto/wide-angle)
button
3. THUMBNAIL button
4. PREV (previous clip jump) button
5. F REV (fast reverse) button
6. PLAY/PAUSE button
8. PUSH AF (momentary auto focus) button
Parts Identifications
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. REC (record) buttons
Press the z button together with the unmarked
button (safety button) to start recording.
8. REC PAUSE buttons
Press the X button together with the unmarked
button (safety button) to pause recording.
9. PUSH SET button (four-way arrow key)
It functions the same as the SEL/SET button
(joystick) on the camcorder.
10. NEXT button
11. STOP button
12. F FWD (fast forward) button
13. PUSH AF button
Note
The SUB CLIP button does not function with this
camcorder.
When you use the remote commander, see “Using the
Parts Identifications
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Indications
Indications in Camera Mode
When this unit is in Camera mode (mode for
recording), pressing the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button displays the statuses and settings of this
unit in the viewfinder.
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button again, these indications are canceled.
The recording status indication, such as “zREC,”
is always displayed, regardless of operation of the
DISPLAY/BATT INFO button.
Remarks
[M]: The indication of the items named with this
suffix can be independently turned on/off
with “Display On/Off” of the VF SET menu
[A]: The indication of items named with this suf-
fix can be turned on/off using the assignable
buttons to which the corresponding on/off
[D]: The settings of the items named with this suf-
fix can be changed using the Direct menu on
1
2
3
4
5
120min STBY
A: 25min
B: 50min
Z99
S&Q REC
TCG 00:00:00:00
25
24
HQ
1080/24P
6
S&Q Motion
29/24fps
7
8
23
22
EX
74%
High Light ND2 21
W
hite Fader
20
19
9
10
11
TLCS
.
7
∗
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
M
F
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000CH1
CH2
++
ATW 4300K PP
O
FF ND
1
12
13 14 15
16
17
18
1. Battery remaining/DC IN voltage
S&Q STBY
Standby for Slow & Quick
Motion recording
zINT REC
Interval Recording in progress
Standby for Interval
Recording
2. i.LINK status indication
INT STBY
Only when an external device is connected to
(zREC or STBY) of the device is displayed.
zFRM REC
Frame Recording in progress
Standby for Frame Recording
FRM STBY
3. Special recording/operation status
indication
4. Media status indication
zREC
Recording in progress
Standby for recording
Slow & Quick Motion
recording in progress
Memory card in slot A is active.
STBY
Memory card in slot B is active.
zS&Q REC
On-Screen Indications
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct Menu Operation
8. Lens extender indication
The settings of the items named with a suffix [D]
can be changed using the Direct menu on the
screen.
Select “All,” “Part,” or “Off” for Direct Menu
menu.
When the Direct mode is set to “Part,” the
operation is limited depending on the GAIN,
SHUTTER, or WHITE BAL switch setting.
When the Direct mode is set to “All,” the GAIN,
SHUTTER, and WHITE BAL switches are
disabled.
(available only when a lens extender is used)
Backlight mode
Standard mode
S
Spotlight mode
11. Focus mode indication [M] ( [D] only in MF
mode) (page 64)
Note
(available only when an auto-focus lens is
mounted)
When the indicator of the FULL AUTO button is
lit, the Direct Menu operation is disabled for the
functions that are forcibly set to the automatic
12. White balance mode and color
To operate the Direct menu
Use the joystick on the handle or the jog dial on
the side operation panel.
17. Shutter mode/shutter speed indication
[M][D] (page 59)
Joystick
Jog dial
19. Histogram indication [M][A]
STATUS
MENU
SEL/SET
CANCEL
MONITOR VOL
THUMBNAIL SEL/SET CANCEL
21. Video level cautioning indication [M]
If the video level is too high or too low, a caution
is generated showing the appropriate ND filter
number.
R
L
ANCE
C
R
O
IT
ON VOL
D
F
FW
M
EL/SET
E
S
U
S
L
A
/P
Y
NEXT
NAIL
M
A
L
P
/
P
THU
O
T
REV
S
P
O
T
F
C
E
/S
T
R
EV
PR
R
A
T
S
D
L
O
H
22. Depth-of-Field indication [M][A]
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
(available only when a serial lens is mounted)
B
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
t
TION
f
m
40
m
T
U
I
SD
O
IR
IS
9
.
5
2
1
23. Brightness level indication [M][A]
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
2
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
O
IN
EX
K
SI
S
C
2
G
N
6
.
T
NLO
0
E
G
5
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
C
M
IO
IN
D
8
.
8
AC
A
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
2
U
D
A
S
I
N
TC
C
1
T
E
IO
E
EX
D
U
TO
U
A
L
A
V
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
24. Special recording mode indication [M]
E
T
O
2
H-
-
+
MA
C
EM
NU
PU
R
AU
AF
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
C
T
GA
O
IN
FF
W
HIT
E
BA
L
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
Frame Rec
Frame Rec mode
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
EL
ICT
UR
PR
E
E
OF
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
Interval Rec
Interval Rec mode
S&Q Motion
xx/xx fps
Slow & Quick Motion mode
EXT-LK
Time code external lock (see
1
Press the joystick or the jog dial.
If “Direct Menu” is set to “All” or “Part,” the
cursor is displayed on one of the items for
which the Direct menu operation is
permitted.
Example: TLCS mode indication
On-Screen Indications
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TLCS
On
7
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
MF
∗
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
ATW 4300K PPOFF ND
1
2
Tilt the joystick or rotate the jog dial to
set the cursor to the item to be operated
then press the joystick or the jog dial.
The Direct menu of the selected items
appears.
Example:
Direct menu for TLCS mode selection
TLCS
TLCS
TLCS
74%
7
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
MF
∗
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/200
ATW 4300K PPOFF ND
1
3
Tilt the joystick or rotate the jog dial to
select the setting then press the joystick
or the jog dial.
The menu disappears, and the new setting is
displayed.
On-Screen Indications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
27
Preparations
Power Supply
You can use a battery pack or AC power via an
AC adaptor.
If you connect an AC power source, it has a
priority even if a battery pack is mounted.
Note
If a battery pack that cannot be used with this
camcorder is mounted, an error message is
appears in the viewfinder. Replace the battery
pack with the BP-U30 or BP-U60, or connect a
power to the DC IN connector after removing the
battery pack.
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and
AC adaptor listed below:
• BP-U30/U60 Lithium-ion Battery Pack
• BC-U1/U2 Battery Charger (usable as an AC
adaptor)
Removing the battery pack
Hold the BATTERY RELEASE button pressed,
slide the battery pack upward to unlock, then pull
it out.
Using a Battery Pack
Mount a BP-U30 or BP-U60 Lithium-ion battery
pack.
One BP-U30 is supplied with this camcorder.
D
O
U
T
N
S
H
O
T
R
A
A
S
T
T
I
H
O
I
D
N
B
V
T
C
U
/
B -
T
I
D
/
U
R
A
T
O
I
N
Notes
G
E
N
L
O
I
C
K
IN
• Before use, charge the battery pack with the
supplied BC-U1/U2 Battery Charger.
T
C
O
U
T
• A warm battery pack immediately after use may
not be able to be fully recharged.
DC IN
M
ON
UT
IT
O
R
O
S
V
ID
E
O
T
N
E
N
T
O
U
P
M
O
C
O
-2
H
C
T
U
O
-1
IO
D
H
C
U
A
Mounting the battery pack
BATTERY
RELEASE
BATTERY
RELEASE
button
CAMERA OFF MEDIA
Fully insert the battery pack then slide it
downward to lock.
Power switch: OFF
Battery pack
Checking battery charge remaining
D
V
T
R
A
A
N
To check during operation
S
S
T
S
H
D
T
I
O
I
O
U
O
I
N
B
T
T
C
U
/
B -
T
I
D
/
U
R
A
T
O
I
N
When recording or playback is in progress on the
battery pack, an icon to show the current battery
charge level and usage time remaining are
displayed in the viewfinder screen.
G
E
N
L
O
C
K
IN
T
C
O
U
T
DC IN
M
O
O
NIT
O
R
UT
S
V
ID
E
O
120min
A: 25min
S&Q REC
T
T
N
E
N
T
O
U
P
M
O
C
O
-2
H
C
T
U
O
-1
IO
D
H
C
U
A
B: 50min
Z99
Battery pack
receptacle
CAMERA OFF MEDIA
Icon
Remaining
Power switch: OFF
100% to 91%
90% to 71%
Power Supply
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Icon
Remaining
If the battery charge remaining becomes
low
70% to 51%
50% to 31%
30% to 11%
10% to 0%
If the battery charge remaining decreases to a
certain level during operation (Low BATT
status), a low-battery message, flashing of the
tally lamps, and a beep sound will warn you.
If the remaining further decreases to a level at
which operation cannot be continued (BATT
Empty status), a battery-empty message appears.
Temporarily set the power switch to OFF and
connect a power source via the DC IN connector
or replace the battery pack with one that is fully
charged.
The camcorder indicates the remaining usage
time in minutes by calculating the available time
with the battery pack if operation is continued at
the current rate of power consumption.
Note
The operating time on a battery pack depends on
the condition (new or old) of the battery pack and
the ambient temperature.
To change the message levels
The Low BATT level is set to 10% of full charge,
and the BATT Empty level is set to 3% of full
charge at the factory. These settings can be
OTHERS menu.
To check in power-off status
Information on the mounted battery pack
(BATTERY INFO) is displayed in the viewfinder
when you hold the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button pressed even if the camcorder is off.
The BATTERY INFO display goes off after 5
seconds.
Using AC Power (DC IN Power)
You can connect an AC power source to this
camcorder by using the supplied BC-U1 or an
optional BC-U2 Battery Charger for BP-U30/
U60 as an AC adaptor, as shown below:
DISPLAY/BATT INFO button
PEAKING
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
ZEBRA
MIRROR IMAGE DISPLAY/BATT INFO
OFF
ON
Connection example: BC-U1
O
F
F
L
H
T
H
IG
R
B
T
S
A
R
T
N
O
C
A
R
G
B
E
IN
Z
K
A
E
P
FO
IN
A
T
T
N
O
I
T
A
R
A
Y
/B
PL
U D
/
IS
T
I
D
B -
E
U
/
AG
C
T
IM
R
O
R
N
C
IR
O
H
M
-1
N
O
I
T
F
B
T
I
F
O
O
S
N
A
F
O
H
S
F
L
H
R
T
l
P
R
j
E
F
A
V
R
E
V
s
T
G
P
U
H
S
/
Y
A
L
N
A
M
L
A
P
/
L I
U
J
S
E
S
O
N
M
E
L
T
I
F
E
S
/
O
R
F
T
W
V
D
O
C
L
A
N
C
E
L
R
LIN
E
S T
S T
A R
O P
T /
D
C
N
I O
T
A
R U D
I T
- B
/
I
N
/ U
C
R E L E A S E
T
CH
-1
F O C U
E X P
S
N
O
O
B
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
R
A N D E D
S
T
AU
DIO IN
M
A
R E V I E W
R E C
CH
-2
O
N
O
IT
U
O
R
MI
T
LIN
C
E
S
M
IC
+4
8V
T
S
R
O
A
T
P
E
R
M
IC
T
L
INE
D
/
C
MI
I
C+
48
N
S
V
E
R
L
F
A
N
E
X
E
O
A
C
P
V
I
S
U
S
D
E
M
O
D
D
E
V E
C
R
N
E
I
E
W
O
I
T
O
U
O
R
T
S
V
I
D
E
O
1
3
DC IN
CH
-1
AU
C
H-2
DI
O
OU
T
CO
MP
ON
EN
C
OU
T
H-1
AU
T
C
D
H-2
IO OUT
C
O
M
P
O
N
T
E
N
O
T
U
2
BATTERY I NFO
50
0
%
%
100%
D
C
O
U
T
C
H
A
R
G
E
0
%
Re
m
aining Ti
m
e
:
20
m
in
B
B
C
8
0
A
T
-U
T
E
1
R
Y
1
0
0
C
H
A
R
G
E
R
BC-U1
1
Connect the DC power output cable of
the BC-U1/U2 to the DC IN connector
of the camcorder.
Power Supply
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Connect the power cord supplied with
the BC-U1/U2 to the AC input
connector of the BC-U1/U2 then to an
AC power source.
Turning Power Off
Set the power switch to the OFF position.
Notes
Set the mode switch of the BC-U1/U2 to
the DC OUT position.
• This camcorder uses a little standby power even
when the power switch is set to OFF. Remove
the battery pack if the camcorder will not be
used for a prolonged period.
For details, refer to the Operating Instructions of the
BC-U1/U2.
• When removing the battery pack or the DC IN
power, be sure to set the switch to OFF in
advance.
Removing the battery pack and the DC IN
power without first setting the power switch to
OFF may cause damage to the camcorder or
SxS memory cards.
When recording or playback is in progress on
power from the DC IN connector, the input
voltage is displayed in the viewfinder.
DC IN 12.0V
A: 25min
S&Q REC
B: 50min
Z99
Note
The battery pack mounted on the camcorder is not
charged even if you set the mode switch of the
BC-U1/U2 to the CHARGE position. To charge
the battery pack, remove it from the camcorder
and mount it on the BC-U1/U2.
Turning Power On
This camcorder has Camera mode for recording
and Media mode for playback.
The mode is selected when you turn the power on.
R
NCEL
R
CA
O
D
IT
L
O
N
V
F
F
W
MO
E
SEL/SET
S
U
A
/P
Y
A
T
L
NEX
NAIL
L
P
/
HUM
T
EV
OP
ST
P
O
T
F
R
C
RE /S
R
A
V
PRE
T
T
S
D
L
O
H
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
B
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
40
m
T
U
O
I
D
IR
IS
S
9
.
5
2
1
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
2
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
O
IN
EX
K
SI
S
C
LO
EN
2
G
N
6
.
T
10
5
G
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
TC
2
A
U
D
A
I
N
C
1
T
E
IO
V
S
EX
D
U
TO
A
U
A
L
E
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
E
T
O
2
-
+
H-
MA
C
EM
R
NU
PU
AU
AF
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
GA
TC
O
IN
FF
W
HI
TE
BA
L
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
Power switch
CAMERA OFF MEDIA
To operate in Camera mode, turn the power on by
setting the power switch to the CAMERA
position.
To operate in Media mode, turn the power on by
setting the power switch to the MEDIA position.
Power Supply
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INITIAL SETT
Ti one: UTC +09:00 TOKYO
ate / Ti e: 2008/01/01 00:00:00 SET
Fi nish
I
NG
Setting the Clock
me
Z
D
m
When you turn the camcorder on for the first time
after purchasing or replacing the backup battery
(page 149), the Initial Setting display appears in
the viewfinder.
Set the date and time of the built-in clock, using
this display.
2
3
4
Tilt the joystick or turn the jog dial to
set the year then press the joystick or
dial.
The cursor moves to the month-setting
column.
Set the month, day, hour, minute, and
second in sequence in the same manner.
INITIAL SETT
Ti one: UTC +09:00 TOKYO
ate / Ti e: 2008/01/01 00:00:00
Fi nish
I
NG
me
Z
When you press the joystick or the jog dial at
“SET,” the cursor moves back to “Date/
Time.”
D
m
Time Zone
Move the cursor to “Finish” then press
the joystick or dial.
The value shows the time difference from UTC
(Coordinated Universal Time).
Change the setting if needed.
The Initial Setting display disappears, and the
clock setting is completed.
The camcorder enters the operation mode
(Camera mode or Media mode) you selected with
the power switch.
Setting the time and date
Use the joystick on the handle or the jog dial on
the side operation panel for setting.
Once after the Initial Setting display disappears,
the time zone and date/time settings can be
Joystick
Jog dial
STATUS
MENU
SEL/SET
CANCEL
MONITOR VOL
Notes
THUMBNAIL SEL/SET CANCEL
• If the clock setting is cleared because of
exhaustion of the backup battery while no
operation power was being supplied (no battery
pack and no DC IN connection), the Initial
Setting display will be displayed when you turn
the camcorder on at the next opportunity.
• While the Initial Setting display is shown, no
other operation except turning the power off is
permitted until you finish the setting for this
display.
R
CEL
AN
C
OR
NIT OL
V
D
F
F
W
MO
L/SET
SE
E
S
T
L
U
A
P
IL
MNA
THU
/
NEX
Y
A
L
/
P
V
OP
ST
P
O
T
F
RE
C
E
/S
R
T
REV
R
A
P
T
S
D
L
O
H
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
B
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
t
TION
f
m
40
m
T
U
O
I
D
IR
IS
S
9
.
5
1
2
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
2
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
4
E
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
O
IN
EX
K
SI
S
C
LO
EN
2
G
N
6
.
T
10
5
G
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
C
M
IO
IN
D
8
.
8
AC
A
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
2
U
D
C
T
A
I
N
C
1
T
E
IO
E
S
EX
D
U
TO
U
A
L
A
V
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
E
T
O
2
-
+
H-
MA
C
EM
NU
PU
R
AU
AF
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
C
T
GA
O
IN
FF
W
HIT
E
B
AL
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
EL
ICT
UR
PR
E
E
OF
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
1
Tilt the joystick or turn the jog dial to
set the cursor to “Date/Time” then
press the joystick or dial.
The cursor moves to the year-setting column.
Setting the Clock
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
operator so that the operator can view the image
clearly in the eyepiece.
Adjusting the Viewfinder
Eyepiece focusing ring
You can adjust the angle and the display
conditions of the viewfinder for best viewing in
various shooting situations.
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
These adjustments of the viewfinder have no
effect on pictures being recorded.
AF
A
Full
MF
STEAD
2
TR SH
O
S
IT
A
.
N
T
IO
Y
B
1
SHO
N
8
T
TC
/U
-B
IT
/D
U
R
A
T
IO
ft
N
40
mm
IR
IS
9
Caution
Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece of
the viewfinder facing the sun. Direct sunlight can
enter through the eyepiece, be focused in the
viewfinder, and cause fire.
You can also attach a commercially available 52-
mm aperture diopter compensation lens.
Adjusting the contrast and brightness
Use the control knobs on the back panel of the
viewfinder.
Attaching the eyepiece (supplied)
BRIGHT control
CONTRAST control
PEAKING
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
ZEBRA
1
MIRROR IMAGE DISPLAY/BATT INFO
OFF
ON
P
O
C
T
E
S
R
/
T
L
R
A
PEAKING
IRR
T
T
S
X
E
N
s
D
J
P
W
/ S
O
T
F
S
F
S
/
CONTRAST
L
E
S
l
E
U
G
V
E
C
A
N
/ P
R
P
A
C
R
A
Y
L
P
T
j
BRIGHT
ZEBRA
E
V
E
L
R
E
F
S
M
I L
O
R
A
L
N
IM
O
M
V
U
AG
H
OFF
E
O
T
I T
D
ISP
LA
Y/BA
TT
N
O
M
ON
2
IN
FO
L
O
T
T
U
UA
C
A
N
T
E
A
IGH
R
B
L
E
M
T
S
S
RA
T
N
O
C
T
O
IO
T
L
RA
D
C
NG
EB
S
I
Z
K
A
E
P
U
E
FO
A
L
IN
TT
1
BA
E
Y/
-
A
L
S
ISP
H
D
E
C
AG
IM
O
OR
I
IRR
F
ON
L
M
D
E
U
OF
V
F
O
A
F
L
H
M
3
E
A
2
-
H
R
G
S
L
T
O
IS
H
S
B
P
GN
l
IS
SI
P
R
D
S
E
C
j
T
R
A
E
F
B
V
R
C
F
O
s
V E
IN
H
U
T
S
C
G
P
N
L
M
LE
S
/
Y
A
N
A
L
A
/
A
P
L I
U
J
S
E
S
O
N
M
E
A
L
I T
O
F
E
S
/
F
T
R
W
V
D
O
C
L
A
N
C
E
2
L
R
1
Y
1 . 9
STEAD
T
SHO
N
. 8
I O
A
T
R U
/
D
I
T
- B
/ U
C
T
CH
-1
N
O
O
B
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
R
S
T
AU
DIO IN
A
CH
-2
MI
LIN
C
E
S
M
IC
+4
8V
T
S
R
O
A
T
P
E
R
M
IC
T
L
INE
D
/
C
MI
I
C+
48
N
V
E
R
L
F
A
N
E
X
E
O
A
C
P
S
U
S
D
E
M
O
D
V E
R
N
E
I
E
W
C
O
I
T
U
O
R
T
S
V
I
D
E
O
Clip
CH
-1
AU
C
H-2
DIO
O
UT
CO
MP
ON
EN
OU
T
T
CONTRAST: For adjusting the brightness
BRIGHT: For adjusting the brightness
When you view the knob from the front,
clockwise rotation increases the level and
counterclockwise rotation decreases it.
1
2
Attach the eyepiece by horizontally
sliding it.
Flip down the eyepiece and lock it at the
the clip on the bottom.
Adjusting the color
Adjusting the focus in the viewfinder
These adjustments can be made using the VF SET
menu.
The eyepiece focusing (diopter compensation)
ring enables adjustment to match the eyesight of
Adjusting the Viewfinder
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode. Select (VF SET menu) then
“VF” from the menu, and adjust “Color.”
VF SET
B
VF
Peaking
Color
ode
:
0
B
B
B
B
M
: Color
Marker
Full
MF
STEADY
SHOT
AF
LENS INFO BRT DISP HISTOGRAM
ASSIGN
00:00
Zebra
Display
IRIS
1
2
3
ND
FILTER
On/Of f
Fixing lever
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
Tighten the fixing lever after the adjustments.
Note
Switching between color and
monochrome modes
When you move the viewfinder forward or
rearward, the angle of the viewfinder varies
simultaneously.
Adjust the angle for your best position after
tightening the fixing lever.
For the viewfinder display, color or monochrome
display can be selected.
Select “VF” from the VF SET menu then select
“Mode.”
Select “B&W” if checking the subject and
focusing are easier on the monochrome display.
If you assign “VF Mode” to one of the assignable
color and monochrome by pressing the button.
Adjusting the angle
You can adjust the angle of the viewfinder.
Note
If the fixing lever below the handle is loose, the
position may vary when you adjust the angle. Be
sure to tighten the lever in advance.
Adjusting the position (distance from
your eye)
Loosening the fixing lever below the handle
(rotating it toward the viewfinder) permits you to
horizontally pull out the support bar and move the
viewfinder forward or rearward with the support
bar as the axis.
1
Adjust the horizontal position.
PEAKING
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
ZEBRA
Full
MF
STEADY
SHOT
AF
LENS INFO BRT DISP HISTOGRAM
ASSIGN
IRIS
1
2
3
MIRROR IMAGE
DISPLAY/BATT INFO
OFF
ON
ND
FILTER
Fixing lever
To reverse the image
The viewfinder can be rotated as much as 180
degrees toward the direction facing the subject.
To read the displayed menu and messages in this
condition, set the MIRROR IMAGE switch to
ON so that the textual information is converted to
the readable direction.
Fixing lever
Tighten
Loosen
2
Move the viewfinder forward or
rearward for the best position.
Adjusting the Viewfinder
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PEAKING
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
ZEBRA
MIRROR
MIRROR IMAGE DISPLAY/BATT INFO
IMAGE switch
OFF
ON
T
H
IG
R
B
T
S
A
R
T
N
O
C
A
R
G
B
E
IN
Z
K
A
E
P
FO
IN
A
T
T
A
Y
/B
PL
IS
D
E
AG
IM
R
O
R
N
IR
O
M
F
F
O
O
F
F
L
H
l
P
R
j
E
F
V
R
E
V
s
T
G
P
U
H
P
S
/
Y
A
L
N
M
L
O
C
T
S
A
P
/
I L
A
/
E
R
T
R
PEAKING
U
L
J
E
S
S
O
M
T
X
E
A
T
S
E
N
L
T
I
F
E
S
/
O
R
N
F
T
s
W
V
D
O
J
P
O
T
S
G
C
L
D
A
W
N
F
C
F
E
CONTRAST
E
S
/
L
L
E
l
E
S
V
E
C
A
U
N
/ P
R
P
A
C
R
A
R
L Y
P
j
T
BRIGHT
ZEBRA
E
V
E
S
/
2
C
L
R
F
M
S
IRR
L I
A
OR IM
L
N
O
M
V
U
AG
H
OFF
E
O
T
I T
DISP
LA
Y
/BA
N
O
M
N
ON
I O
T
T
A
T
R U
INF
O
/ D
T
I
B -
U
/
C
T
CH
-1
N
O
O
B
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
R
S
T
AU
DIO IN
A
CH
-2
O
L
T
T
AU
UA
E
AN
L
M
E
MI
LIN
C
S
E
T
O
L
S
M
IC
+4
8V
T
S
R
O
I
O
A
T
P
E
R
M
IC
T
T
L
INE
D
C
/
D
S
C
MI
U
E
I
C+
48
N
V
A
L
E
R
L
F
E
1
E
O
X
E
S
A
C
P
-
H
S
A
U
N
S
D
E
M
O
D
C
V E
C
R
I
E
N
W
E
O
I
O
I
T
L
U
O
R
D
T
E
U
V
A
M
3
E
A
2
-
H
R
G
S
L
T
O
IS
S
H
S
B
V
P
GN
S
I
I
DI
SS
E
C
C
C
D
T
R
A
E
B
O
O
NF
1
I
S
N
LE
A
A
2
Y
1 . 9
STEAD
T
SHO
8
CH
-1
AU
C
H-2
DI
O
OU
T
CO
MP
ON
EN
OU
T
T
1
When the camcorder is in Media mode, the
picture is also inverted both vertically and
horizontally. In Camera mode, the picture is
inverted only vertically, while it is also inverted
Normally use it in the locked position.
Although you can open it farther from the lock
position, once return it to the closed position to
lock it at the 120-degree position again.
Opening/detaching the eyepiece (to
directly view the LCD screen)
To detach
You can directly view the LCD screen inside the
viewfinder by opening the eyepiece.
3
4
P
O
C
T
E
S
R
/
T
L
R
A
PEAKI
N
T
T
S
X
E
N
G
s
D
J
P
W
O
T
F
S
F
E
S
/
CO
N
TRAST
L
E
S
l
E
G
V
E
R
C
A U
N
/ P
A
P
C
R
A
Y
L
P
T
j
BRIGHT
ZEBRA
E
V
S
/
E
L
R
F
M
S
IR
L I
R
OR
A
L
N
IM
O
M
V
U
AG
H
OFF
E
O
T
2
I T
D
IS
N
O
P
LA
M
Y
O
/BA
N
TT
I
N
FO
L
O
T
T
UA
C
AU
N
E
A
L
E
M
S
T
O
L
O
I
T
C
D
S
U
E
A
L
I
1
-
E
S
H
C
O
I
L
D
E
U
V
A
T
M
3
E
LCD screen
RA
2
-
G
S
L
O
IST
H
S
H
B
P
GN
S
I
D
L
DI
SS
E
C
C
C
RT
A
B
O
H
O
INF
S
N
LE
A
A
1
6
:
9
W
ID
2
E
S
C
1
R
E
E
Y
N
1 . 9
STEAD
T
SHO
. 8
1
A
F
A
F
F
u
STEAD
Y
ll
T
RA
S
H
N
S
M
OT
ITI
SHO
B
O
N
81.2
T
To open
Push the clip on the bottom to release and flip up
the eyepiece.
It locks at the 120-degree position.
1
2
Push the clip on the bottom to release.
Flip up the eyepiece.
Adjusting the Viewfinder
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Slide the knob on the top to the opposite
side of the eyepiece.
Adjusting the Lens
Detach the eyepiece by horizontally
sliding it.
The supplied VCL-614B2X and the optional
for the PMW-EX3 are called “exclusive lenses”
in this manual.
Caution
Do not leave the camcorder with the lens facing
the sun. Direct sunlight can enter through the lens,
be focused in the camcorder, and cause fire.
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length
It is necessary to adjust the flange focal length
(the distance from the lens flange to the plane of
the image along the optical axis) if the focus does
not match properly from telephoto to wide angle
during zoom operations.
Repeated adjustment is not necessary as long as
the same lens is used.
T
H
IG
R
B
T
S
A
R
T
N
O
C
A
R
G
B
E
IN
Z
K
A
E
P
FO
IN
A
T
T
A
Y
/B
PL
IS
D
E
AG
IM
R
O
R
N
IR
O
M
F
F
O
O
F
F
L
H
l
P
R
j
E
F
V
R
E
V
s
T
G
P
U
H
S
/
Y
A
L
N
A
M
L
A
P
/
L I
U
J
S
E
S
O
N
M
E
/ S
L
O
R
T
I
F
E
F
T
W
V
D
O
C
L
A
N
C
E
L
R
N
O
I
T
A
R U
/ D I T
- B
/ U
C
T
CH
-1
N
O
O
B
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
R
S
T
AU
DIO IN
A
CH
-2
MI
LIN
C
E
S
M
IC
+4
8V
T
S
R
O
A
T
P
E
R
M
IC
T
L
INE
D
/
C
MI
I
C+
48
N
V
E
R
L
F
A
N
E
X
E
O
A
C
P
S
U
S
D
E
M
O
D
V E
R
N
E
I
E
W
C
O
I
T
U
O
R
T
S
V
I
D
E
O
CH
-1
AU
C
H-2
DI
O
O
UT
CO
MP
ON
EN
OU
T
T
ZOOM switch
ZOOM
MANU
SERVO
IRIS switch
FULL
MF
STEADY
SHOT
AF
IRIS
Focus ring
Zoom ring
MANU AUTO
MACRO
OFF ON
FOCUS
MANU AUTO
PUSH AF
Adjusting the Lens
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
35
With the supplied or optional exclusive 1/2-inch
EX Mount lens, the flange focal length can be
adjusted automatically.
LENS
Execute
ancel
Auto FB ADJ
F i l e
F lare
B
B
B
C
Notes
00:00
• If a subject of insufficient contrast is used, or if
the camcorder or subject moves during the
adjustment, adjustment cannot be made
properly. Once the adjustment begins, do not
touch the camcorder body or lens until it ends.
• When the Shutter is in SLS mode, be sure to set
the SLS setting to OFF before starting the
adjustment.
Shading
6
Move the cursor to “Execute” then
press the joystick or the jog dial.
The adjustment begins.
During adjustment
The in-progress message is displayed.
• Be careful that no light source, such as a lamp,
the sun, or a bright window, is in field of view
during flange focal length adjustment.
When the adjustment finished
The completion message is displayed.
1
Start the camcorder in Camera mode
by setting the power switch to
CAMERA.
If the adjustment fails
Check the conditions of the subject and lighting
then perform the adjustment again.
2
3
Set the IRIS switch to AUTO.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
Place a high-contrast subject, such as a
flange focal length adjustment chart,
about 3 m (10 ft.) away from the
When a lens other than the exclusive lenses is
used, adjust the flange focal length manually.
camcorder, and light it well enough to
provide a sufficient video output level.
Replacing the Lens
In addition to the supplied VCL-614B2X
standard zoom lens, a wide zoom lens exclusively
for the PMW-EX3 is available as an option.
Optional exclusive lens
Fujinon XS8X4AS-XB8: 1/2-inch EX Mount
lens
approx. 3 m
Using the supplied lens adaptor, a Sony 1/2-inch
Bayonet Mount lens can be mounted.
Note, however, that available functions, menu
settings and performance may be restricted with
non-exclusive lens.
4
5
Set the ZOOM switch to SERVO
(Power Zoom mode).
For non-exclusive but usable lenses, consult your
Sony service representative.
Press the MENU button to set the
camcorder to Menu mode, and select
(the LENS menu) then “Auto FB
ADJ” from the menu.
Note
Turn off the camcorder before replacing the lens.
Adjusting the Lens
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
Removing the supplied lens
P
O
C
T
E
S
/
R
T
R
PEAKI
T
A
T
S
X
E
N
G
N
C
s
L
D
J
P
W
O
T
F
S
F
S
/
E
l
O
N
L
S
E
U
G
V
E
TR
AST
C
A
N
/ P
R
P
A
C
R
A
Y
L
P
T
j
BRIGHT
ZEBRA
E
V
E
/ S
R
L
E
F
S
M
IRR
To remove the supplied lens, proceed as follows:
L I
O
A
R
L
N
I
M
O
M
V
U
AG
H
OFF
E
O
T
T
I
DIS
N
O
PL
M
A
Y
O
/BA
N
TT
IN
FO
M
3
A
R
G
TO
IS
H
W
P
N
IS
SIG
D
S
T
BR
A
FO
IN
S
N
LE
T
P
O
C
T
E
S
/
R
T
R
PEAKI
N
T
A
T
S
X
E
N
G
s
L
D
J
P
W
O
T
F
S
F
S
/
CO
N
TRAST
1
2
L
E
S
l
E
U
G
V
E
C
A
N
/ P
R
P
A
Y
C
R
A
L
P
j
T
BRIGHT
ZEBRA
E
V
E
/ S
L
R
1
E
F
S
M
IR
L I
R
OR IM
A
L
N
O
M
V
U
AGE
H
OFF
O
T
T
I
D
N
IS
PLA
O
M
Y
O
/BA
N
T
T
I
N
FO
IL
F
O
T
U
A
L
UL
2
F
-
+
E
M
A
R
F
Y
M
A
/C
S
1 . 9
STEAD
T
SHO
IN
A
2 . 8
G
4
M
A
R
L
M
H
G
TO
IS
H
W
P
N
ll
u
IS
SIG
D
S
F
T
R
A
B
F
FO
M
5 . 6
2
IN
S
N
LE
L
E
NC
T
A
C
F
m
8
T
E
/S
f t
O
m
T
U
L
E
A
S
U
N
A
M
6
A
S
1
SI
U
N
G
E
M
N
1
4
S
H
O
R
U
T
T
S
U
1 0
C
A
T
A
M
E
R
ST
3 0
O
3
F
F
W
H
T
C
B
A
L
O
N
2
5
5
1
D
N
F
T
IL
N
O
F
F
O
O
T
U
A
3
L
UL
0
1
S
U
F
C
O
F
-
E
M
A
R
F
2
7
Y
M
O
T
+
A
U
A
1 . 9
/C
S
STEAD
R
T
A
B
SHO
L
A
B
E
IT
H
W
IN
A
2 . 8
G
B
A
P
W
A
T
T
S
4
A
L
M
H
l
M
l
u
F
F
5 . 6
L
E
C
N
A
C
F
m
8
T
E
/S
f t
O
m
T
U
L
E
A
S
U
N
A
M
6
A
S
S
U
N
IG
E
M
N
1
4
S
O
H
U
R
T
S
U
T
3
1 0
C
T
A
M
E
T
A
S
R
3 0
O
FF
W
H
T
C
B
A
L
O
N
5
5
LOCK
1
N
O
F
F
O
3
0
1
S
U
C
O
F
2
7
O
T
U
RELEASE
A
1
LOCK
RELEASE
1
Align the alignment pin of the lens with
the recess at the top of the mount section
of the camcorder and set the lens in
place.
1
2
3
Set the lens mount stopper switch to the
RELEASE position.
2
3
Turn the lens mount lever downward.
While holding the lens, turn the lens
mount lever upward until it stops.
Return the lens mount stopper switch to
the LOCK position.
Pull the lens forward to remove.
Attaching a Sony 1/2-inch Bayonet Mount
lens
Notes
• When another lens is not immediately attached,
attach the supplied lens mount cap and secure it
by turning the lens mount lever downward.
• When a non-exclusive lens is mounted for the
first time, it may take about 20 seconds to start
up the camcorder.
Use the lens adaptor supplied with the camcorder.
1
Attach the lens adaptor to the
camcorder.
P
O
C
T
E
S
R
/
T
R
PEAKI
N
T
A
T
S
X
E
N
G
s
L
D
J
P
W
O
T
F
S
F
E
S
/
CO
N
TRAST
L
E
S
l
E
U
G
V
E
C
A
N
/ P
R
P
A
C
R
A
Y
L
P
T
j
BRIGHT
ZEBRA
E
V
E
/ S
L
R
F
M
S
IR
L I
R
OR
A
L
N
IM
O
M
V
U
AG
H
OFF
E
O
T
T
I
D
IS
PL
N
O
M
A
Y/BA
O
N
T
T
Attaching an exclusive lens
I
N
FO
To attach the optional 1/2-inch EX Mount lens,
proceed as follows:
The supplied lens once removed can also be
mounted in the same manner.
M
3
A
R
G
TO
IS
H
P
GN
IS
SI
D
S
T
R
A
B
FO
IN
S
N
LE
2
1
1
Lens adaptor
(supplied)
F
T
IL
O
T
U
A
L
UL
2
F
-
E
M
A
R
F
M
A
/C
M
2
H
L
E
C
N
A
C
T
E
/S
L
E
S
A
S
U
N
S
IG
E
M
N
4
S
H
U
T
S
U
T
T
E
T
S
A
R
O
FF
W
H
T
B
A
L
O
N
3
LOCK
RELEASE
1 Align the alignment pin of the lens
adaptor with the recess at the top of the
Adjusting the Lens
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
mount section and set the adaptor in
place.
When using a non-exclusive lens
You can use the lens file in which you stored the
compensation data for the lens, using the LENS
menu.
2 Turn the lens mount lever of the
camcorder downward. (Keep the lens
mount lever of the lens adaptor in the
upper position.)
For the storage method, see “Lens File Operations”
3 Return the lens stopper switch to the
LOCK position.
When you mount a serial lens
The corresponding file is automatically retrieved.
2
Attach the lens.
When you mount a non-serial lens
Retrieve the corresponding lens file, using the
LENS menu.
P
O
C
T
E
S
R
/
T
R
PEAKI
N
T
A
T
S
X
E
N
G
C
s
L
D
J
P
W
O
T
F
S
F
E
S
/
E
l
O
N
L
S
E
U
G
V
E
TRAST
C
A
N
/ P
R
P
A
Y
C
R
A
L
P
j
T
BRIGHT
ZEBRA
E
V
E
/ S
R
L
F
M
S
IR
I L
RO
A
R
IM
AGE
L
N
O
M
V
U
H
OFF
O
T
T
I
DISP
LA
N
O
M
Y
/BA
O
N
T
T
I
N
FO
1
Press the MENU button to set the
camcorder to Menu mode and select
(the LENS menu).
M
3
A
R
G
TO
IS
H
P
GN
IS
SI
D
S
T
R
A
B
FO
IN
S
N
LE
1
2
D
IL
N
R
E
T
F
O
T
U
A
L
UL
2
F
-
E
M
A
R
1
F
M
A
C
2
Select “Recall” from “File” then the
corresponding lens file from the list.
M
2
H
L
E
C
N
A
C
T
E
/S
L
E
S
A
S
U
N
S
IG
E
N
4
S
H
U
T
S
U
M
T
T
E
T
S
A
R
O
FF
W
H
T
B
A
L
O
N
1
LENS
VCL-614B2X
Auto FB ADJ
F i l e
F lare
Lens ID
ecal l
Store
XS
8
X4AS-XB8
Sony 1/2-inch Bayonet
Mount lens (optional)
B
B
B
B
B
R
User_F i l e
User_F i l e
User_F i l e
User_F i l e
1
2
3
4
00:00
Shading
F i l e ID
:
No
O
f fset
Auto
Recal l : On
1 Align the alignment pin of the lens with
the recess of the adaptor and set the lens
in place.
3
When the confirmation message is
displayed, select “Execute.”
2 Turn the lens mount lever of the adaptor
downward.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
To detach the lens, reverse the above procedure.
Retrieving the Lens File
By your storing the data (such as compensation
data) specific to the lenses in files, required
adjustments and compensation can be performed
merely by retrieving the appropriate file when
changing lenses.
When using an exclusive lens
The optimum compensation data for the two
exclusive lenses are stored in the corresponding
lens files at the factory to be automatically
retrieved (with LENS menu “Auto Recall: On”).
Adjusting the Lens
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Grip
Using the Cheek Pad
The grip rotates approx. 120 degrees to support a
variety of shooting styles.
Holding the RELEASE button pressed, slowly
rotate the grip.
When you operate the camcorder with it on your
right shoulder, the cheek pad prevents the control
parts on the side panel of the camcorder from
directly hitting your face.
IN
IO
D
U
A
-1
H
C
Attaching the cheek pad
IC
48V
M
+
IC
M
E
LIN
8V
IC
+4
M
IC
M
E
LIN
To attach the cheek pad, the shoulder pad and the
cable clamp for optional accessories must be once
detached.
R
E
L
E
A
S
E
T
N
S
H
O
R
A
A
S
T
T
I
O
I
N
B
T
C
U
E
X
F
P
O
A
C
N
U
D
S
E
D
R
V
E
C
IE
W
R
E
R
E
L
E
A
S
E
S
S
T
T
A
O
R
T
P
1
Remove the shoulder pad.
/
LOC
RELEASE
Grip
T
SLO
SELECT
INT
EX
S
S
T
E
C
TO
UA
AN
C
B
AU
M
L
A
A
IO
D
U
IN
A
-1
IO
D
C
LE
E
H
C
U
INT
T
EX
A
S
T
IO
D
U
V
E
TO
UA
AN
AU
L
A
L
L
E
M
-2
H
C
3
X
-
E
W
M
P
N
E
P
O
RA
OFF
MEDIA
EXPANDED
FOCUS
REC
REVIEW
RELEASE
1
RELEASE button
START/
2
1
Click positions are provided at each 15 degrees.
Release the RELEASE button at the desired click
position to lock the grip.
3
Fixing plate
Shoulder pad
1 While holding the knob depressed, pull
the shoulder pad outward until it stops.
2 Remove the fixing plate from the bottom
of the camcorder after loosening the
screw.
3 Pull the shoulder pad to remove.
2
Remove the cable clamp for optional
accessories.
Cable clamp
T
SLO
SELECT
INT
S
S
T
E
C
EX
TO
UA
AN
C
A
B
AU
M
L
A
IO
D
U
IN
A
-1
IO
D
C
LE
E
H
C
U
INT
T
EX
A
S
T
IO
D
U
V
E
TO
UA
AN
AU
L
A
L
L
E
M
-2
H
C
3
X
-
E
W
M
P
Adjusting the Grip / Using the Cheek Pad
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
39
3
Insert the cheek pad from the back of
the camcorder and secure it with the
supplied screws.
Supplied screw
Align the holes on the bottom of the mount
frame of the cheek pad with those of the
camcorder.
Cable clamp
T
SLO
SELECT
INT
S
S
T
E
C
EX
TO
UA
AN
C
A
B
AU
M
L
A
IO
D
U
IN
A
-1
IO
D
C
LE
E
H
C
U
INT
T
EX
A
S
T
IO
D
U
V
E
TO
UA
AN
AU
L
A
L
L
E
M
-2
H
C
3
X
-
E
W
M
Mount frame of
the cheek pad
P
N
E
P
O
R
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
T
SLO
SELECT
INT
S
S
T
E
C
EX
TO
UA
AN
C
A
B
AU
M
L
A
IO
D
U
IN
A
-1
IO
D
C
LE
E
H
C
U
INT
T
EX
A
S
T
IO
D
U
V
E
TO
UA
AN
AU
L
A
L
L
E
M
-2
H
C
3
X
-
E
W
M
P
N
E
P
O
RA
OFF
ME
DIA
Pole of the
cheek pad
6
While holding the pole upward, flip the
pad toward the side panel of the
camcorder.
4
Return the shoulder pad to its original
position.
T
SLO
SELECT
INT
S
S
T
E
C
EX
TO
AN
C
A
B
AU
M
L
UA
T
A
IO
D
U
IN
A
-1
IO
D
I
H
C
U
A
E
S
INT
T
EX
C
LE
IO
D
U
V
E
TO
UA
AN
AU
L
A
L
L
E
M
-2
H
C
3
X
-
E
W
M
P
I
T
H
C
T
E
E
N
I
L
N
E
E
T
X
P
O
S
T
O
L
O
T
S
L
U
A
A
U
RA
OFF
MEDIA
N
A
IO
M
D
I
U
A
N
T
E
I
IN
T
X
-1
IO
D
L
C
T
U
C
A
E
O
T
E
U
A
L
A
IO
E
S
U
D
N
U
L
A
M
A
V
E
1
L
-2
H
C
3
3
-EX3
W
PM
N
OPE
ED
IA
Cheek pad
2
To attach the DC cable clamp
The supplied DC cable clamp can be attached to
the frame of the cheek pad at one of the accessory
screw holes on the opposite side of the pad.
U1/U2 connected to the DC IN connector can be
tied down with the clamp.
1 Insert the axis of the shoulder pad in the
hole of the camcorder.
2 Secure the fixing plate to its original
position with the screw.
3 While holding the knob, push in on the
shoulder pad.
5
Attach the cable clamp you removed in
step 2.
Align the hole of the cable clamp with those
on the mount frame of the cheek pad (at the
top of the pole) and the camcorder then
secure them all together with the supplied
screw.
(Keep the original screw removed in step 2
for future use.)
Using the Cheek Pad
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40
Using the IR Remote
Commander
H
D
V
S
D
I
O
N
U
T
T C
/ U
- B I T
B
/ D
U
R A
T I O
N
G
E
N
T
L
O
C
I
C
K
N
I
N
R
E
M
O
T
E
Before use
T
C
O
U
T
Before you use the supplied IR Remote
Commander for the first time, pull out the
insulation sheet from the battery holder.
D
C
MO
N
IT
OR
I
N
OUT
S
V
ID
E
O
M
CO
CH-2
IO OUT
D
CH-1
AU
Insulation sheet
Accessory screw holes
A CR2025 lithium battery is set in the holder at
the factory.
1
2
1
To use the IR Remote Commander
DC output
cable clamp
For controlling the camcorder from the IR
Remote Commander, activate the remote control
function of the camcorder after turning the power
on.
Activating/deactivating the remote control
function can be achieved using the Setup menu or
an assignable button.
1
2
Insert the cable clamp to the frame so
that the rear projection of the cable
clamp fits in the slot on the frame.
Adjust the position of the clamp by
sliding it so that the screw hole of the
clamp aligns with that of the frame.
To activate using the menu
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode, select
(the OTHERS menu)
and set “IR Remote” to “On.”
Secure the clamp, using the supplied
screw.
O
C
THERS
lock Set
B
Language
Assign Button
Tal l y
:
Engl i sh
B
B
B
00:00
H
ours
IR
Bat tery Alar
M
eter
O
n
R
e
mote
:
B
Of f
m
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
To activate using an assignable button
Assigning “IR Remote” to one of the assignable
buttons permits you to activate/deactivate the
remote control function by pressing the button.
For the assignable buttons, see“Changing Functions
Using the IR Remote Commander
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
WARNING
To avoid malfunctions, the remote control
function is automatically deactivated when the
camcorder is turned off. Activate the function
each time when required after you turn the
camcorder on.
Battery may explode if mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, or dispose of in
fire.
CAUTION
Battery lifetime
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey
the law in the relative area or country.
When the lithium battery’s power falls, the IR
Remote Commander may not work even if you
press the buttons. The average lithium battery’s
service life is about one year, but this depends on
the pattern of use.
If pressing the remote control buttons produces
absolutely no effect on the camcorder, replace the
battery then check the operation again.
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement
incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement
avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type
équivalent recommandé par le constructeur.
Lorsque vous mettez la batterie au rebut, vous
devez respecter la législation en vigueur dans le
pays ou la région où vous vous trouvez.
Replacing the battery in the IR Remote
Commander
Use a commercially available CR2025 lithium
battery. Do not use any battery other than a
CR2025.
VORSICHT
1
Hold down the lock lever 1, pull out
the battery holder 2, and remove the
battery.
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung falscher
Batterien. Batterien nur durch den vom Hersteller
empfohlenen oder einen gleichwertigen Typ
ersetzen.
Wenn Sie die Batterie entsorgen, müssen Sie die
Gesetze der jeweiligen Region und des jeweiligen
Landes befolgen.
2
1
2
Place a new battery in the battery
holder with the + symbol facing upward
1, then push the battery holder into the
IR Remote Commander until it clicks
2.
With the + symbol upward
1
2
Using the IR Remote Commander
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
Handling SxS Memory
Cards
This camcorder records audio and video on SxS
memory cards (optional) inserted in the card slots.
• We recommend that you make a backup copy of
important data. Sony accepts no responsibility
for any damage or loss of data you recorded.
• Do not apply a label sheet in places other than
the label space. When applying the label sheet
to this media, do not allow it to protrude from its
proper location.
About SxS Memory Cards
Usable SxS memory cards
Use the following Sony-made SxS memory cards
(SxS PRO) with this camcorder:
• SBP-8 (8GB)
• SBP-16 (16GB)
• SBP-32 (32GB)
Operations are not guaranteed with memory cards
other than SxS PRO.
Label space
These cards comply with the ExpressCard
standard.
• SxS memory cards to be used with this
camcorder must be formatted using the format
function of this camcorder. If a card is formatted
using other device, it is regarded as of a
different format, requiring repeated format
operation on this camcorder.
(Formatting or deleting with the function of the
camcorder does not completely delete data on
this media. When transferring or disposing of
this media, use a commercial data deleting
software or destroy the actual body at you own
responsibility.)
• If the available recording time on a card is short,
clip operation may be restricted. In such a case,
delete unnecessary files by using a PC.
• Remove or reinsert the case card with the case
opened properly.
• SxS and SxS PRO are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
• The ExpressCard word mark and logo are owned by
Personal Computer Memory Card International
Association (PCMCIA) and are licensed to Sony
Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of
their respective owners.
Notes on using SxS memory cards
• Recorded data may be damaged or lost in the
following situations:
—If you remove this media or turn off the
power while formatting, reading or writing
data.
—If you use this media in locations subject to
static electricity or electrical noise.
• Do not use or store this media in the following
locations:
—Where recommended operating conditions
are exceeded.
—Inside a closed car in summer; or in strong
sunshine / under direct sunlight / near a
heater, etc.
—Humid or corrosive location
• Verify the correct direction of insertion before
use.
For write protection
Setting the write-protect switch of the SxS
memory card to “WP” disables you to record, edit
or delete data.
• When storing or carrying this media, put this
media in the carrying case and lock it firmly.
Handling SxS Memory Cards
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Write-protect switch
TC/U-BIT/D
UR
A
TIO
N
SDI OUT
T
O
G
RA
M
T
C
LE
E
S
T
A
N
I
2
LO
S
EXT
G
S
O
S
T
E
AU
MA
C
L
B
UA
N
IO
N
D
I
U
A
A
-1
H
C
IO
N
I
D
U
N
I
A
T
TC
C
LE
E
IO
V
S
EXT
D
U
O
T
A
L
E
AU
MA
L
LE
UA
N
-2
H
C
T
O
A
M
-EX3
W
Note
PM
N
E
P
O
Do not operate the write-protect switch of an SxS
memory card while it is set in the camcorder.
Temporarily remove the card from the camcorder
before changing the switch setting.
1
PICTURE
PR
E
L
OFILE
CAMERA
OFF
MEDIA
Inserting/Removing an SxS
Memory Card
2
Insert the SxS memory card into the
slot.
The card slots are located behind a cover.
TC/U-BIT/DUR
A
TIO
N
SDI OUT
SLOT SELECT button
T
O
G
R
A
M
T
C
E
L
E
S
T
O
A
N
I
S
L
S
S
IG
N
EXT
G
O
T
AU
MA
L
UA
N
IO
N
D
I
U
A
ACCESS
-1
H
C
IO
E
L
N
I
D
A
B
U
N
I
A
T
TC
C
SLOT SELECT
E
IO
V
S
EXT
D
E
U
O
T
A
L
E
AU
MA
L
L
UA
N
-2
H
C
ACCESS lamps
-EX3
W
Card slots
PM
PIC
E
L
PR
OF
MERA
OFF
MEDIA
EJECT buttons
With the label
facing right
Cover
R
EL
NC
CA
R
O
NIT OL
D
ET
FW
F
V
MO
E
SEL/S
S
U
A
/P
Y
A
The ACCESS lamp lights in red then changes
to green once the memory card is ready for
use.
L
NEXT
NAIL
L
P
/
P
O
ST
THUM
V
P
O
T
/S
T
R
F
RE
C
E
EV
R
PR
A
T
S
D
L
O
H
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
B
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
40
m
T
U
O
I
SD
IR
IS
9
.
5
1
2
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
2
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
CR
O
IN
1
5
O
AS
L
IN
EX
K
SI
S
C
2
G
N
6
.
T
NLO
1
E
G
5
3
Close the cover.
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
2
A
U
D
C
T
A
S
I
N
C
1
T
E
IO
E
EX
D
U
TO
U
A
L
A
V
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
E
T
O
2
-
+
H-
MA
C
EM
NU
PU
R
AU
AF
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
GA
TC
O
IN
FF
W
HI
TE
BA
L
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
Status indications by the ACCESS lamps
Card slots A and B are accompanied by the
respective ACCESS lamps to indicate their
statuses.
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
Inserting an SxS memory card
Lamp
Slot statuses
Lights in
red
Accessing the loaded SxS memory card
(writing/reading data)
1
Pull up the cover to release the lock then
open.
Lights in
green
Standby (ready for recording or
playback using the loaded SxS memory
card)
Handling SxS Memory Cards
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44
destroyed. Be sure that the ACCESS lamps are
lit in green or off when you turn off the power
or remove memory cards.
• When you turn the camcorder on by setting the
power switch to MEDIA (Media mode), a
display to show that an SxS memory card is
being confirmed appears in the viewfinder.
Lamp
Off
Slot statuses
• No SxS memory card is loaded.
• The loaded card is invalid.
• An SxS memory card is loaded, but
another slot is active.
Removing an SxS memory card
1
Open the cover, once press the EJECT
button to release the lock, then pull the
button out.
The display automatically changes to the
memory card is inside, but it remains on the
screen if no valid memory card is loaded.
TC/U-BIT/DUR
A
TIO
N
SDI OUT
T
O
G
R
A
M
T
C
E
L
E
S
T
A
N
I
S
LO
S
S
IG
N
EXT
G
O
T
AU
MA
L
UA
N
IO
N
D
I
U
A
-1
H
C
IO
N
I
D
U
N
I
A
T
TC
C
LE
E
IO
V
S
EXT
D
E
U
O
T
Switching Between SxS Memory
Cards
A
L
E
AU
MA
L
L
UA
N
-2
H
C
A
M
-EX3
W
When SxS memory cards are loaded in both card
slots A and B, press the SLOT SELECT button to
select the card you wish to use.
PM
PIC
E
L
PR
OF
MERA
OFF
MEDIA
If a card becomes full during recording, switching
to the other card is automatically executed.
Note
Press and unlock the button.
The SLOT SELECT button is disabled while
playback is in progress. Switching is not executed
even if you press the button. The button is enabled
2
Press the EJECT button again to
remove the card.
TC/U-BIT/DUR
A
TIO
N
SDI OUT
Formatting an SxS Memory Card
T
O
G
R
A
M
T
C
E
L
E
S
T
O
A
N
I
S
L
S
S
IG
Formatting may be required before using an SxS
memory card with this camcorder. For an SxS
memory card that is not formatted or that was
formatted with another system, a message to
confirm if formatting is to be executed is
displayed in the viewfinder.
N
EXT
G
O
T
AU
MA
L
UA
N
IO
N
D
I
U
A
-1
H
C
IO
N
TC I
D
U
N
I
A
T
C
LE
E
IO
V
S
EXT
D
E
U
O
T
A
L
E
AU
MA
L
L
UA
N
-2
H
C
A
M
-EX3
W
PM
Note on formatting
PIC
E
L
PR
OF
MERA
Any SxS memory card formatted with a device
other than this camcorder cannot be used with the
camcorder.
OFF
MEDIA
To execute formatting
Notes
If the message for formatting is displayed,
turn the jog dial or tilt the joystick to select
“Execute” then press the dial or joystick.
• Data are not guaranteed if the power is turned
off or a memory card is removed while the card
is being accessed. All data on the card may be
Formatting begins.
Handling SxS Memory Cards
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The in-progress message and status bar (%) are
displayed, and the ACCESS lamp lights in red.
When formatting is completed, the completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
Note
A
icon appears if the memory card is write-
protected.
Recording/playback during formatting
You can perform recording or playback using the
SxS memory card in the other card slot while
formatting is in progress.
Replacing an SxS memory card
• If the available time on two cards in total
becomes less than 5 minutes, a message “Media
Near Full,” flashing of the tally lamps, and a
beep sound will warn you. Replace the cards
with those with sufficient space.
• If you continue recording until the total
remaining time reaches zero, the message
changes to “Media Full,” and recording stops.
If formatting fails
A write-protected SxS memory card or memory
card that cannot be used with this camcorder will
not be formatted.
As a warning message is displayed, replace the
card with an appropriate SxS memory card, as per
the instructions in the message.
Note
Approximately 600 clips can be recorded on one
SxS memory card at maximum.
If the number of recorded clips reaches the limit,
the remaining time indication becomes “0,” and
the message “Media Full” is displayed.
To format by menu operation
When no formatting message is displayed in the
viewfinder, you can execute formatting using
menu in the same manner.
Restoring an SxS Memory Card
Notes
• All the data, including recorded pictures and
setup files, are erased when a memory card is
formatted.
• SxS memory cards to be used with this
camcorder must be formatted using the format
function of this camcorder. Any card formatted
with other device must be formatted again with
this camcorder.
If an error occurs with data in a memory card for
some reason, the card must be restored.
If an SxS memory card that needs to be restored
is loaded, a message that prompts you to execute
a restore operation is displayed in the viewfinder.
To restore a card
Select “Execute” by turning the jog dial or
tilting the joystick then push the dial or
joystick.
Checking the Remaining Time
Available for Recording
The restore operation begins.
During restoration, an in-progress message and
status bar (%) are displayed, and the ACCESS
lamp is lit in red.
When restoration is completed, a completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
In Camera mode, you can check the time
remaining for the SxS memory cards loaded in the
card slots in the viewfinder.
120min
A: 25min
STBY
T
If restoration fails
B: 50min
Z99
• A write-protected SxS memory card or one on
which an error occurred cannot be restored. For
such a card, a warning message is displayed.
Release the write protection or replace the card,
as per the instructions in the message.
• An SxS memory card on which an error
occurred may become usable again through
repeated formatting.
The available time for recording with the current
video format (recording bit rate) is calculated
according to the remaining space of each card and
displayed in time units of minutes.
The remaining can also be checked in a meter
format on the BATTERY/MEDIA status screen
Handling SxS Memory Cards
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• In some cases, only parts of clips cannot be
restored. Playback of the restored clips becomes
possible again.
• The following operation may restore an SxS
memory card for which the message “Could not
Restore Some Clips” is repeatedly displayed
each time you try the restoration process:
Using the PHU-60K
You can use an optional PHU-60K Professional
Hard Disk Unit with this camcorder. The PHU-
60K incorporates a 60GB 1.8-inch hard disk, on
which up to 200 minutes of HD video can be
recorded in HQ mode.
1 Copy necessary clips to another SxS memory
the camcorder or the XDCAM EX Clip
Note
2 Format the problem SxS memory card, using
the format function of this camcorder.
properly achieved with the PHU-60K.
3 Return the necessary clips to the SxS
memory card by copy operation.
Recording/playback during restoration
You can perform recording or playback using the
SxS memory card in the other card slot while
restoration is in progress.
Connecting/Removing the PHU
Connection Cable
Recording/playback can be made using the PHU-
60K in the same manner as with SxS memory
cards by mounting the PHU-60K on the accessory
shoe of the camcorder and connecting the PHU
connection cable to an SxS memory card slot.
To update the managerial file
If clips cannot be played back, updating the
managerial file on the card may improve the
situation.
For this operation, use “Update Media” of “Clip”
(page 130) of the OTHERS menu.
For the mounting method, refer to the instructions
supplied with the PHU-60K.
Connecting the PHU connection cable
1
2
Set the power switch of the camcorder
to the CAMERA position.
Open the cover of the card slot and plug
the PHU connection cable into the slot.
TC/U-BIT/DUR
A
TIO
N
SDI OUT
T
O
G
R
A
M
T
C
LE
E
S
T
A
N
I
S
LO
S
S
IG
N
EXT
G
O
T
AU
MA
L
UA
N
IO
N
D
I
U
A
-1
H
C
IO
N
I
D
U
N
I
A
T
TC
C
E
L
E
IO
V
S
EXT
D
E
U
L
O
T
A
L
E
AU
MA
L
UA
N
-2
H
C
A
M
-EX3
W
PM
PIC
E
L
PR
O
MERA
OFF
MEDIA
Insert so that the cable extends upward.
Using the PHU-60K
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
47
Any PHU-60K formatted with a device other than
this camcorder cannot be used with the
camcorder.
3
Pass the cable through the cable guide
slot above the card slot B and close the
cover.
O
N
SDI OUT
To execute formatting
T
O
G
R
A
M
T
C
E
L
E
S
T
O
A
N
I
S
L
S
S
IG
N
If the message for formatting is displayed,
turn the jog dial or tilt the joystick to select
“Execute” then press the dial or joystick.
EXT
G
O
T
AU
MA
L
UA
N
IO
N
D
I
U
A
-1
H
C
IO
N
I
D
U
N
I
A
T
TC
C
E
L
E
IO
V
S
EXT
D
E
U
O
T
A
L
E
AU
MA
L
L
UA
N
-2
H
C
Formatting begins.
A
M
An in-progress message and status bar (%) are
displayed, and the ACCESS lamp lights in red.
When formatting is completed, a completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
-EX3
W
PM
PIC
E
L
PR
O
MERA
OFF
MEDIA
To format by menu operation
When no formatting message is displayed in the
viewfinder, you can execute formatting using
menu in the same manner.
Pass through the cable guide slot.
4
Secure the cable at the cable clamp.
Notes
• Formatting for the PHU-60K on this camcorder
is “Quick Format” with which only the
managerial data are erased. To erase the
recording data completely, connect the unit to a
PC and perform “Full Format.”
• The PHU-60K to be used with this camcorder
must be formatted using the format function of
this camcorder. Any PHU-60K formatted with
another device must be formatted again with
this camcorder.
A
T
S
H
N
S
IT
IO
R
A
O
T
B
N
TC/U-BIT/DURA
TION
SDI OUT
H
3
IS
T
O
G
R
A
M
T
C
E
L
E
S
T
A
S
LO
S
IN
EXT
S
IG
N
GE
S
O
T
S
E
AU
MANU
C
B
AL
C
A
IO
D
IN
U
A
A
-1
H
C
IO
D
U
IN
EXT
A
T
TC IN
C
LE
E
IO
V
S
D
E
U
O
T
A
L
E
AU
MANU
AL
L
-2
H
C
Cable clamp
5
Turn on the PHU-60K.
Checking the Remaining Time
Available for Recording
The POWER indicator of the PHU-60K
lights in green.
Subsequently, the ACCESS lamp of the
camcorder lights in red then changes to green
once the unit is ready for use.
In Camera mode, the remaining capacity (in
minutes) of the PHU-60K connected via a card
slot is displayed in the viewfinder.
Disconnecting the PHU connection cable
120min
A: - - - min
B: 185min
Z99
STBY
T
Operate in the same manner as when you remove
an SxS memory card from the slot.
The available time for recording with the current
video format (recording bit rate) is calculated
according to the remaining space of the hard disk
and displayed in time units of minutes.
The remaining capacity can also be checked in a
meter format on the BATTERY/MEDIA status
Formatting the PHU-60K
For a PHU-60K that is not formatted or that was
formatted with another system, a message to
confirm if formatting is to be executed is
displayed in the viewfinder.
Using the PHU-60K
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Restoring the PHU-60K
If an error occurs with data on the PHU-60K for
some reason, the hard disk must be restored.
If a PHU-60K that needs to be restored is
connected, a message that prompts you to execute
restoration is displayed in the viewfinder.
To restore the hard disk
Select “Execute” by turning the jog dial or
tilting the joystick then push the dial or
joystick.
The restoration begins.
During restoration, an in-progress message and
status bar (%) are displayed, and the ACCESS
lamp is lit in red.
When restoration is completed, a completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
If restoration fails
• A PHU-60K on which an error occurred may
become usable again through repeated
formatting.
• In some cases, only parts of clips cannot be
restored. Playback of the restored clips becomes
possible again.
Using the PHU-60K
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
49
Recording
Basic Operation Procedure
The operations described in this section assume
that you are using the supplied or optional
exclusive lens. The displays and menu settings
may differ when a non-exclusive lens is used.
Basic recording with the exclusive lens can be
performed with the following procedures:
REC START/STOP
7,8
Viewfinder
4
R
L
REC REVIEW
E
C
N
A
R
C
D
ITO
T
W
F
L
E
N
O
O
V
/S
L
F
9
M
E
E
S
S
T
X
L
AU
Y/P
PLA
IL
E
N
A
N
M
/
U
H
P
O
T
T
V
E
R
S
P
F
O
T
C
E
V
/S
T
R
E
R
R
A
P
T
S
D
L
O
H
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
H
SI
T
IO
O
T
B
N
81.2
TC
/U
-B
IT
/D
U
R
A
T
IO
0
N
ft
m
4
m
IR
IS
SDI OUT
9
.
5
1
2
E
N
S
IN
F
O
0
BR
T
0
D
IS
P
Battery pack
3
2.8
1
H
3
IS
M
T
OG
A
N
R
A
U
M
AU
T
T
C
O
4
E
L
E
1
2
1
S
5
M
A
C
T
N
I
1
5
R
O
A
S
L
S
O
I
N
S
2
IG
N
LOCK
N
GE
T
.6
5
X
E
1
O
T
U
A
L
A
U
3
S
AN
S
1 0
E
M
IO
C
D
I
8
C
U
A
A
B
. 8
5
O
F
F
1
N
-
H
O
N
C
IO
N
I
D
2
A
U
IN
TC
A
S
T
F
O
C
C
U
1
E
L
T
X
S
E
IO
V
E
D
U
O
T
A
L
U
A
E
L
A
U
C
L
E
N
A
1
M
-
+
-2
TE
REMO
H
C
M
A
N
U
U
A
U
FU
L
P
TO
S
L
A
H
A
U
T
F
F
R
O
A
M
E
GAI
TC OUT
O
F
N
F
W
HITE BAL
L
B
A
R
M
H
S/C
A
A
T
W
M
-EX3
B
A
W
P
R
S
T
PM
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
Memory card(s)
S
E
L
/S
E
T
CA
N
CEL
PIC
P
T
F
U
ILE
R
E
RO
Lens cap OPEN
C
A
M
E
R
A
O
FF
3
M
E
D
IA
FULL AUTO
CAMERA OFF MEDIA
6
Power switch: CAMERA
5
When using the remote commander, activate the remote
Preparations
Note
1
2
Mount a fully charged battery pack.
Load SxS memory card(s).
When you hold the camcorder by the grip,
support it from underneath with your left hand.
If you load two cards, recording is continued
by automatically switching to the second
card when the first card becomes full.
3
Pull up on the lens cap open/close lever
to open the lens cap built in the lens
hood.
4
5
Adjust the viewfinder for best viewing.
Set the power switch to the CAMERA
position.
The camcorder is turned on and enters
Camera mode.
Basic Operation Procedure
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50
be used, it is recommended to set the lever to the
HOLD position to lock the button.
Recording (Full Auto mode)
6
Press the FULL AUTO button so that
the button indicator lights.
REC
START/STOP
Full Auto mode is turned on, activating the
TLCS (Total Level Control System) (page
120).
HOLD
REC HOLD lever
Thus Auto Iris, AGC (Auto Gain Control),
Auto Shutter, ATW (Auto Tracing White)
are set to ON, whereby the brightness and
white balance will be automatically adjusted.
To unlock the button, return the lever to its
original position.
Checking the last recorded clip (Rec
Review)
When you wish to adjust them manually, turn Full
Auto mode off, and see;
9
Press the REC REVIEW button.
activated, and the last recorded clip is played
back for the specified time in the viewfinder.
When playback reaches the end of the clip,
the camcorder returns to STBY (recording
standby) mode.
Note
AF (Auto Focus) is not activated by setting
the camcorder to Full Auto mode.
For information of automatic focus adjustment,
see page 66.
To delete clips
You can delete the last recorded clip by using the
Last Clip DEL function.
7
8
Press the REC START/STOP button.
You can start with either of the REC START/
STOP button on the handle or that on the grip
of the lens.
(If you are using the IR Remote Commander, press
the REC button simultaneously with the unmarked
button.)
Use the All Clips DEL function when you wish to
delete all recorded clips from a memory card.
The front and rear tally lamps light and
recording begins.
To specify a clip to be deleted, operate the
camcorder in Media mode.
To stop recording, press the REC
START/STOP button again.
(If you are using the IR Remote Commander, press
the REC PAUSE button simultaneously with the
unmarked button.)
Recording stops and the camcorder enters
STBY (recording standby) mode.
Note
Recording cannot be restarted after you stop
recording until the ACCESS lamp lights in green.
To prevent a switching error
The REC START/STOP button on the handle is
incorporated with the REC HOLD lever. If the
REC START/STOP button on the handle will not
Basic Operation Procedure
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L
Clip (recording data) and clip name
When you stop recording, video, audio and
subsidiary data from the start to end of the
recording are recorded as a single clip on an
SxS memory card.
Selecting the Video
Format
For each clip recorded with this camcorder, a
clip name of 8 characters (the first four
alphanumerics and the second four numerics) is
automatically generated.
You can select various video formats for
recording/playback using “Video Format” (page
130) of the OTHERS menu.
The current format is displayed on the screen
when you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button.
Example: ABCD0001
The first four alphanumerics can be specified as
OTHERS menu before you start recording. (It
cannot be changed after recording.)
The second four-digit number is automatically
counted up in sequence.
T
STBY
TCG 00:00:00:00
1080/60i
H
Q
S&Q Motion
29/24fps
Notes on Clips
The XDCAM EX-series products employ the
Selectable Formats
FAT32 File System.
The selectable formats depend on whether
set to “NTSC Area” or “PAL Area.”
Thus, recorded materials may be segmented in
multiple files depending on the file size. But the
camcorder can play such materials seemlessly.
A long clip can be recorded crossing over two
memory cards in slot A and B.
When you copy clips to a hard disk drive, etc.
using a computer, it is recommended to use the
XDCAM EX Clip Browsing Software on the
supplied CD-ROM.
The video formats set on this camcorder cover the
recording bit rate (HQ/SP), recording picture size
(effective resolution), recording frame rate, and
recording scan system (i/P).
The frame rates are indicated with two-digit
integers, rounding off the fractional part.
Note
When you select an HQ format, recording is made
with the bit rate of 35 Mbps VBR.
When you select an SP format, recording is made
with the HDV-compatible bit rate of 25 Mbps
CBR.
If copying is done using Explorer (Windows)
or Finder (MAC), the continuity and
relationships of recorded materials may not be
maintained.
With “NTSC Area” selected
Format
Indication on this
camcorder
HQ 1920 × 1080
59.94 interlace
SP 1440 × 1080
59.94 interlace
HQ 1920 × 1080
29.97 Progressive
HQ 1080/60i
SP 1080/60i
HQ 1080/30P
HQ 1080/24P
SP 1080/24P
HQ 720/60P
HQ 1920 × 1080
23.98 Progressive
SP 1440 × 1080
23.98 Progressive
HQ 1280 × 720
59.94 Progressive
Selecting the Video Format
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Format
Indication on this
camcorder
Switching the ND Filters
HQ 1280 × 720
29.97 Progressive
HQ 1280 × 720
23.98 Progressive
HQ 720/30P
HQ 720/24P
ND filters are available for keeping the aperture
in a proper range.
With “PAL Area” selected
Set the ND filter switch according to the
brightness of the subject.
Format
Indication on this
camcorder
HQ 1920 × 1080
50 interlace
HQ 1080/50i
SP 1440 × 1080
50 interlace
SP 1080/50i
HQ 1080/25P
HQ 720/50P
HQ 720/25P
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
HQ 1920 × 1080
25 Progressive
HQ 1280 × 720
50 Progressive
AF
A
Ful
l
S
T
E
TR SH
ANS OT
ON
MF
A
D
Y
ITI
B
S
H
81.2
OT
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
40
m
T
U
O
I
D
IR
IS
S
9
.
5
1
2
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
2
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
RAM
AN
U
A
UT
T
C
LE
O
4
1
E
S
5
MA
CR
T
1
5
O
AS
SI
L
O
IN
EX
K
IN
2
G
N
S
C
O
6
.
T
NL
1
E
G
5
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
IO
IN
TC
2
A
U
D
A
S
I
N
FO
C
CUS
1
E
L
T
E
IO
E
EX
D
U
TO
U
A
L
A
V
L
C
LE
UA
1
AN
M
E
T
O
2
H-
-
+
MA
C
M
RE
NU
PU
AU
AF
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
GA
TC
O
IN
FF
W
HIT
E
BA
L
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
HQ 1280 × 720
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
25 Progressive
MED
IA
ND
FILTER
2
1
Changing the Format
ND filter switch
OFF
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode, display the OTHERS menu with
, and set “Video Format.”
1
2: / ND
64
1
1: / ND
8
OFF: Clear
O
G
THERS
enlock
B
HQ 1080/60i
SP 1080/60i
HQ 1080/30P
HQ 1080/24P
SP 1080/24P
HQ 720/60P
HQ 720/30P
The ND filter number is displayed on the screen
when you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button.
Di rect
i. LINK I/
Tr i gger
ountry
Video For
l i p
M
enu
O
:
:
:
:
:
B
Mode
00:00
C
m
at
TLCS
.
C
7
∗
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
M
F
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
ATW 4300K PPOFF ND
1
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
Note
Signals from the COMPONENT OUT, SDI
OUT, MONITOR OUT, and S VIDEO
connectors are also output according to the format
selected with this menu.
No indication is obtained if the ND filter switch is
set to OFF.
Note on recording format in SP 1080/24P mode
When recording in SP 1440 × 1080 mode at 23.98
in Progressive mode (indicated as SP 1080/24P
on this camcorder), pictures are recorded at 59.94
in Interlace mode (indicated as SP 1080/60i) by
pull-down processing.
Switching the ND Filters
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-
FULL AUTO
FRAME
Adjusting the White
Balance
+
WHITE BAL switch
GAIN
L
WHITE BAL BARS/CAM
ATW
B
M
A
H
PRST
The white balance must be adjusted to suit to the
color temperature of the light source.
You can select the adjustment mode according to
the shooting conditions.
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
AF
A
Fu
ll
S
T
E
T
R
S
H
MF
A
D
OT
ANS OT
ITI
ON
Y
B
1.2
S
H
8
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
m
40
T
U
O
I
SD
IR
IS
9
.
5
1
2
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
2
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
O
IN
EX
K
SI
S
C
2
G
N
6
.
T
NLO
1
E
G
5
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
TC
2
A
U
D
A
S
I
N
C
1
T
E
IO
V
EX
D
U
TO
A
U
A
L
E
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
E
T
O
2
H-
-
+
MA
C
EM
R
NU
PU
AU
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
AF
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
GA
TC
O
IN
FF
W
HIT
E
BA
L
Preset mode
L
B
AR
3
X
-E
M
H
S/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
The color temperature is adjusted to the preset
value (factory setting: 3200K) in this mode.
Select this mode when there is no time to adjust
the white balance or when you wish to fix the
white balance to the condition of you set for a
Picture Profile.
B: ATW or Memory B mode
A: Memory A mode
PRST: Preset mode
• Setting the camcorder to Full Auto mode (page
51) forcibly activates ATW mode.
• Assigning the ATW on/off function to an
assignable button permits you to independently
activate/deactivate ATW when Full Auto mode
is off.
Memory A mode, Memory B mode
• The white balance is adjusted to the value stored
in memory A or memory B.
• Pressing the WHT BAL button executes auto
white balance and stores the adjusted value in
memory A or memory B.
For details on the assignable buttons, see “Changing
ATW (Auto-Tracing White balance) mode
Using the Direct menu
In this mode, the camcorder automatically adjusts
the white balance to the appropriate condition.
When the color temperature of the light source
changes, the white balance adjustment is
automatically executed.
Five steps of adjustment speed can be selected
SET menu.
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button, the current adjustment mode and color
temperature are displayed on the screen.
TLCS
.
7
∗
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
M
F
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
ATW 4300K PPOFF ND
1
ATW: ATW mode
Selecting the Adjustment Mode
Using the switch
W:A: Memory A mode
W:B: Memory B mode
W:P: Preset mode
You can select Preset mode, Memory A mode, or
ATW (Memory B) mode with the WHITE BAL
switch.
To the B position of the WHITE BAL switch,
ATW mode is assigned at the factory. The setting
can be changed with “White Switch” (page 120)
of the CAMERA SET menu to select Memory B
mode.
When the Direct menu is in All mode, you can
select from among ATW, W:A, W:B, and W:P.
When the Direct menu is in Part mode, you can
switch between ATW and the mode set with the
WHITE BAL switch.
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
Adjusting the White Balance
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
completion message, and the obtained color
temperature is displayed.
Executing Auto White Balance
• When you execute the adjustment in a memory
mode, the adjusted value is stored in memory
(A or B) selected in step 1.
• When you execute the adjustment in ATW
mode, adjustment in ATW is resumed.
Execute auto white-balance adjustment according
to the color temperature of the light source.
The adjustment value can be stored in memory A
or B.
Note
If auto white-balance adjustment fails
An error message is displayed on the screen for
approximately three seconds.
Auto white-balance adjustment cannot be
executed in Preset mode.
If the error message is displayed, try auto white-
balance adjustment again.
If the error message continues to be displayed
after several attempts, consult your Sony service
representative.
1
To store the adjustment value in
memory, select Memory A or Memory
B mode.
2
3
Select the appropriate ND filter
according to the lighting condition.
Place a white subject under the same
lighting condition and zoom in on it so
that a white area is obtained on the
screen.
A white object (white cloth, a white wall,
etc.) near the subject may be used in place.
Be careful not to have any spots of high
illumination on the screen.
4
5
Adjust the lens iris opening.
Set it to the proper condition if the manual
iris adjustment mode is selected.
Press the WHT BAL button.
Auto white-balance adjustment begins.
P
O
C
T
E
/ S
R
T
R
A
P
EAK
T
X E
L
T
S
IN
G
N
s
D
P
O
W
F
T
S
F
S
/
CO
NT
G J
V E
R
AS
L
E S
l
E
C N
U
A
P
R
A
C
R
/
Y
P
T
A
L
T
E S
P
V E
j
B
RIG
/
L
R
H
T
E S
F
MI
L I
RRO
F
L
A
N
R
IM
A
O
V
M
U H
GE
O
T
T
O
F
I
N
O
D
ISP
O
L
A
M
Y
/BA
N
TT
T
IN
IN
FO
T
X
ZE
E
BR
A
O
I
D
U
N
O
L
T
A
T
E
U
U
IN
A
N
A
I
T
X
A
M
T
SELECT
O
I
T
C
O
L
D
T
A
U
SLO
U
E
U
A
N
A
A
L
1
E
S
-
M
H
C
O
I
L
D
E
E
U
V
A
AM
3
2
-
H
GR
S
L
3
X
E
TO
HIS
S
E
C
B
N
T
BR
D
ISP
AS
SIG
C
FO
IN
NS
C
LE
A
-
W
A
2
M
1
D
Y
O
P
EA
SH
1 . 9
ST
T
8
.
2
ND
ER
L
T
FI
4
TO
AU
L
F
UL
ll
M
F
u
. 6
2
F
5
-
+
PEN
O
E
M
F
1
F
RA
m
8
A
t
f
m
TO
AU
U
N
A
M
6
1
/CAM
RS
BA
0
O
L
R
C
A
0
3
1
BA
TE
M
HI
W
IN
C
GA
B
DI
ME
A
5
5
W
A
O
FF
A
T
A
ER
1
S
T
P
A
L
M
H
C
AM
E
E
UR
CT
IL
ON
PI
O
FF
OF
PR
3
0
1
FOCUS
EL
NC
CA
T
SE
L/
SE
2
7
S
E
NU
M
S
TO
TE
T
US
AU
R
A
ST
F
W
HT
BA
ON
L
WHT BAL
SHUTTER
OFF ON
WHT BAL button
ASSIGN
4
During adjustment, an in-progress message is
displayed on the screen. When the adjustment is
completed successfully, the message changes to a
Adjusting the White Balance
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Black
Balance
Displaying the Markers
and Zebra Patterns
With this camcorder, the black balance is
automatically adjusted each time the power is
turned on. You can readjust it, using the menu,
when needed.
During recording, various markers and zebra
patterns can be inserted into the image in the
viewfinder.
This does not affect recording signals.
Use the CAMERA SET menu for the adjustment.
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode, display the CAMERA SET menu
Displaying the Markers
with
, and select “Auto BLK Balance” from
Use “Marker” of the VF SET menu.
the menu.
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode, display the VF SET menu with
, and select “Marker” from the menu.
CA
MERA SET
A
uto BLK
B
alance
Execute
Cancel
B
B
B
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
VF SET
00:00
S
lo
w
Shutter
B
VF
Peaking
Set t i ng
Safet y Zone
Safet y Area
:
:
O
O
n
n
B
B
B
B
A
: Of f
Marker
: 90%
:
:
00:00
Zebra
Display
Center
Aspect
M
M
arker
arker
O
O
n
n
O
n/
O
f f
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
Aspect Select
: 4 : 3
Activating the marker indications
Select “Execute” to start the black balance
adjustment.
During adjustment, an in-progress message is
displayed. When the adjustment is completed
successfully, the message changes to a
completion message.
• Set “Setting” to “On” then turn the markers on/
off independently.
No marker is displayed when “Setting” is “Off.”
• Assigning the Marker on/off function to one of
the assignable buttons permits you to operate
“Setting: On/Off” by pressing the button.
For the assignable buttons, see “Changing
Displaying the safety-zone marker
Set “Safety Zone” to “On” to insert the safety-
zone marker to the screen.
With “Safety Area” you can select the size of the
safety-zone marker from among 80%, 90%,
92.5%, and 95% of the picture area.
Adjusting the Black Balance / Displaying the Markers and Zebra Patterns
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56
Example: 95%
Displaying the Zebra Patterns
120min
STBY
TCG 00:00:00:00
A zebra pattern(s) can be inserted to the picture in
the viewfinder to check the appropriate
luminance level.
Factory-set zebras
1 (70%)
2 (100%)
When the aspect marker is on, the safety zone
marker shows the effective area within the aspect
marker.
Displaying the center marker
Set “Center Marker” to “On” to insert the center
marker into the screen area.
Turning the zebra-pattern indication on/
off
120min
STBY
TCG 00:00:00:00
Pressing the ZEBRA button turns the zebra
pattern-indication on/off.
ZEBRA button
PEAKING
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
ZEBRA
Displaying the aspect marker
MIRROR IMAGE DISPLAY/BATT INFO
OFF
ON
Set “Aspect Marker” to “On” to insert the aspect
marker into the screen area.
Select the width of the marker from among 4:3,
13:9, 14:9, and 15:9 with “Aspect Select.”
T
H
IG
R
B
T
S
A
R
T
N
O
C
A
R
G
B
E
IN
Z
K
A
E
P
FO
IN
T
A
T
A
Y
/B
PL
IS
D
E
AG
IM
R
O
R
N
IR
O
M
F
F
O
O
F
F
L
H
l
Example: 4:3
P
R
j
E
F
V
R
E
V
s
T
G
P
U
H
A
L
N
A
M
L
S
/
Y
/
I L
A
P
U
J
S
E
S
O
N
M
E
F
E
/ S
L
O
R
T
I
F
T
W
V
D
O
C
L
A
N
C
E
L
R
120min
STBY
TCG 00:00:00:00
N
I O
A
T
R U
/
D
I
T
- B
/ U
C
T
CH
-1
N
O
O
B
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
R
S
T
AU
DIO IN
A
CH
-2
MI
LIN
C
E
S
M
IC
+4
8V
T
S
R
O
A
T
P
E
R
M
IC
T
L
INE
D
/
C
MI
I
C+
48
N
V
E
R
L
F
A
N
E
X
E
O
A
C
P
S
U
S
D
E
M
O
D
V E
R
N
E
I
E
W
C
O
I
T
U
O
R
T
S
V
I
D
E
O
CH
-1
AU
C
H-2
DIO
O
UT
CO
MP
ON
EN
OU
T
T
Displaying the guide frame lines
Changing the zebra pattern
Set “Guide Frame” to “On” to insert the guide
frame lines into the screen area.
Using “Zebra” of the VF SET menu, you can
change the zebra pattern to be displayed.
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode, display the VF SET menu with
, and select “Zebra” from the menu.
120min
STBY
TCG 00:00:00:00
Displaying the Markers and Zebra Patterns
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VF SET
Setting the Gain
B
B
B
B
B
VF
Peaking
Marker
00:00
Zebra
Display
Zebra Select : 1
Zebra1 Level : 70
O
n/
O
f f
You can set the gain of the video amplifier
according to the brightness of the subject.
Select the setting mode required by the shooting
conditions.
Zebra Select
Select the zebra pattern(s) to be displayed.
1 (Zebra1): To display a zebra pattern in the area
of ±10% centering the video level set with
“Zebra1 Level”
Fixed gain mode (manual gain
adjustment)
Select the gain of the video amplifier, using the
switch or a menu operation.
2 (Zebra2): To display a zebra pattern for the
video level over 100%
Both: To display both Zebra1 and Zebra2
AGC mode (automatic gain control)
Zebra1 Level
Set the center level of Zebra1 in the range of 50 to
107%. The default setting is 70%.
The gain of the video amplifier is automatically
adjusted according to the picture brightness.
Recording With Fixed Gain
Selecting the gain with the switch
Select the gain, using the GAIN switch.
Note
When AGC mode is on, the fixed gain cannot be
selected.
-
FULL AUTO
FRAME
+
GAIN switch
GAIN
L
WHITE BAL BARS/CAM
ATW
B
M
A
H
PAST
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
AF
A
Fu
ll
S
T
E
T
R
S
H
MF
A
D
OT
ANS OT
ITI
ON
Y
B
1.2
S
H
8
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
m
40
T
U
O
I
SD
IR
IS
9
.
5
1
2
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
2
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
O
IN
EX
K
SI
S
C
2
G
N
6
.
T
NLO
1
E
G
5
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
2
A
U
D
C
T
A
I
N
C
1
T
E
IO
V
S
EX
D
U
TO
A
U
A
L
E
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
E
T
O
2
H-
-
+
MA
C
EM
NU
PU
R
AU
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
AF
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
GA
TC
O
IN
FF
W
HI
TE
BA
L
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
The gain value at each of the switch positions are
set at the factory are as follows:
L: 0 dB
M: 9 dB
H: 18 dB
These values can be changed in the range of
–3 dB to +18 dB, using the CAMERA SET menu.
Setting the Gain
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode, display the CAMERA SET menu
Setting the Electronic
Shutter
with
, and select “Gain Setup” from the
menu.
C
A
M
E
R
A SET
The electronic shutter of the camcorder permits
you to change the shutter speed (the accumulation
time per recording frame).
The electronic shutter can be adjusted
automatically or manually as required.
A
uto BLK
Balance
B
B
B
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
Low
Mid
High
:
:
:
0dB
9dB
18dB
00:00
S
lo
w
Shutter
A
: Of f
Fixed Shutter (manual adjustment)
modes
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
Recording is made with a specified shutter speed
(accumulation time).
Selecting gain using the Direct menu
Standard modes (Speed mode/Angle mode)
These modes may be especially effective when
you wish to record a quick-moving subject with
little blurring.
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button, the current gain value is displayed on the
screen.
You can select Speed mode or Angle mode. In
Angle mode, you can specify the shutter speed by
setting the shutter angle.
TLCS
.
7
∗
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
M
F
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
ATW 4300K PPOFF ND
1
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
Specify the shutter speed by frequency. This
mode may be used to shoot the monitor screen
eliminating horizontal bands.
When the Direct menu is in All mode, you can
change the gain in steps of 3 dB with the Direct
menu by operating the joystick or the jog dial.
You can also select AGC mode with the Direct
menu.
When the Direct menu is in Part mode, you can
switch between AGC and the gain selected with
the GAIN switch.
SLS (Slow Shutter) mode
For shooting a subject in low-level lighting
conditions. Specify the shutter speed in the
number of accumulated frames.
EX Slow Shutter mode
Note
This is an advanced mode of SLS mode. The
shutter speed is specified in the number of
accumulated frames. Up to 64 frames can be
accumulated in this mode, permitting you to
obtain low-noise clear pictures in low light levels
or a surreal pictures with afterimages.
When the camcorder is in Full Auto mode (page
51), the Direct menu cannot be selected.
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
Auto Shutter mode
Recording in AGC Mode
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted
according to the picture brightness.
When you set the camcorder to Full Auto mode
(page 51), AGC mode is forcibly selected.
When Full Auto mode is off, you can
independently turn AGC mode on by setting
CAMERA SET menu or selecting AGC with the
Direct menu.
Shooting in a Fixed Shutter Mode
When you set the SHUTTER switch to ON, the
fixed shutter is turned on in the mode and with the
Setting the Electronic Shutter
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
shutter speed you specified with “Shutter” of the
CAMERA SET menu.
Frame rate Shutter speed (sec.)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
25P
/
/
/
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
,
33 50 60 100 120 125 250
1
1
1
Note
,
/
,
/
500 1000 2000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
30P
When Auto Shutter mode is ON, the fixed shutter
cannot be selected.
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
40 50 60 100 120 125 250
1
1
,
/
,
/
500 1000 2000
Angle (standard angle) mode
Set “Mode” to “Angle,” and specify the shutter
P
O
C
T
E
S
R
/
T
T
X E
L
R
A
T
S
P
EAK
IN
G
N
s
D
P
O
angle with “Shutter Angle.”
W
F
T
S
F
S
/
CO
NT
G J
V E
R
AS
L
E S
l
E
C N
U
A
P
R
A
C
R
/
Y
P
T
A
L
T
E S
P
V E
j
B
RIG
/
L
R
H
T
E S
F
MI
L I
RRO
F
L
A
N
R
IM
A
O
V
M
U H
GE
O
T
T
O
F
I
N
O
D
ISP
O
L
A
M
Y
/BA
N
TT
T
IN
IN
FO
T
X
ZE
E
BR
A
O
I
D
U
N
O
L
T
A
T
E
U
U
IN
A
N
A
I
T
X
A
M
You can select from among 180, 90, 45, 22.5, and
11.25 degrees.
T
SELECT
O
I
T
O
L
SLO
D
C
T
A
U
U
E
U
A
N
A
A
L
1
E
S
-
M
H
C
O
I
L
D
E
E
U
V
A
AM
3
2
-
H
GR
S
L
3
X
E
TO
HIS
S
E
C
B
N
ISP
SIG
C
T
BR
D
AS
FO
IN
NS
C
LE
A
-
W
A
2
M
1
D
Y
O
P
EA
SH
1 . 9
ST
T
8
.
2
ND
ER
L
T
FI
4
TO
AU
L
F
UL
ll
M
F
u
. 6
2
F
5
-
+
PEN
O
E
M
F
1
F
RA
m
8
t
f
m
TO
AU
U
N
MA
6
1
/CAM
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
Set “Mode” to “ECS,” and specify the frequency
with “ECS Frequency.”
RS
BA
0
O
R
C
AL
0
3
1
A
M
B
TE
HI
W
IN
C
GA
B
DI
ME
A
5
5
W
A
O
FF
A
T
A
ER
1
S
T
P
A
L
M
H
C
AM
E
E
UR
CT
IL
ON
PI
O
FF
OF
PR
3
0
1
FOCUS
EL
NC
CA
T
SE
L/
SE
2
7
A
I
E
NU
M
TO
T
TE
T
US
AU
R
A
ST
W
HT
BA
ON
L
The available setting values vary depending on
the current frame rate.
WHT BAL
SLS (Slow Shutter) mode
SHUTTER
OFF ON
ASSIGN
4
Set “Mode” to “SLS,” and specify the number of
accumulated frames with “SLS Frame.”
You can select in the range of 2 to 8 frames.
SHUTTER switch
Note
Setting the fixed shutter with the
CAMERA SET menu
Slow Shutter cannot be used in SP 1080/24P
mode or Slow & Quick Motion mode.
The shutter mode and shutter speed can be set
with the CAMERA SET menu.
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode, display the CAMERA SET menu
Setting with the Direct menu
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button, the current shutter mode and the set value
are displayed.
with
, and select “Shutter.”
CA
MERA
SET
A
uto BLK alance
B
M
ode
:
Speed
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
B
B
B
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
Shut ter Speed: 1/125
Shut ter Angle : 180
ECS Frequency : 60.02
SLS Frame
ND
1
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000CH1
CH2
O
++
00:00
S
lo
w
S
hutter
:
2
A
:
Of f
When the Direct menu is in All mode, you can
change the shutter mode and speed with the
Direct menu by operating the joystick or the jog
dial.
Speed (standard speed) mode
Set “Mode” to “Speed,” and specify the time ([ 1/
setting value ] sec.) with “Shutter Speed.”
The available setting values vary depending on
the current frame rate.
Notes
• When the Direct menu is in Part mode, you
cannot turn the shutter on/off with the Direct
menu if the SHUTTER switch is set to ON.
If the SHUTTER switch is set to OFF, only
switching between Auto Shutter and Shutter
OFF.
• The Direct menu cannot be selected when the
when the EX Slow Shutter mode is set to “On.”
Frame rate Shutter speed (sec.)
60i, 60P
50i, 50P
1
1
1
1
1
1
/
/
/
/
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
60, 100 120 125 250 500
1
1
,
/
1000 2000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
24P
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
32 48 50 60 96 100 120
1
1
1
1
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
125 250 500 1000 2000
Setting the Electronic Shutter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
Adjusting the Iris
Shooting in EX Slow Shutter Mode
Select “EX Slow Shutter” from the CAMERA
SET menu.
Adjust the iris opening according to the
brightness of the subject.
C
A
M
E
R
A
SET
Auto Iris mode
A
uto BLK alance
B
The iris is automatically adjusted according to the
brightness of the subject.
B
B
B
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
00:00
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
S
lo
w
S
hutter
Set t ing
Nu ber of
:
Of f
m
Frames : 16
Manual Iris mode
A
:
Of f
Adjust the iris opening using the iris ring or with
a menu operation.
Set “Setting” to “On,” and specify the number of
accumulated frames with “Number of Frames.”
You can select from among 16, 32, and 64 frames.
IRIS switch
FULL
STEADY
SHOT
AF
MF
Notes
IRIS
MANU AUTO
MACRO
• EX Slow Shutter cannot be used in SP 1080/24P
mode or Slow & Quick Motion mode.
• The SHUTTER switch has no effect on the EX
Slow Shutter setting.
OFF ON
FOCUS
MANU AUTO
PUSH AF
Iris ring
• The EX Slow Shutter On/Off setting cannot be
changed during recording.
• You cannot set the camcorder to Full Auto
mode is set to “On.”
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
AF
A
Fu
ll
S
T
E
T
R
S
H
MF
A
D
OT
ANS OT
ITI
ON
Y
B
1.2
S
H
8
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
m
40
T
U
O
I
D
IR
IS
S
9
.
5
1
2
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
2
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
O
K
IN
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
IN
EX
SI
S
C
O
2
G
N
6
.
T
NL
E
1
5
G
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
2
A
U
D
C
T
A
S
I
N
C
1
Shooting in Auto Shutter Mode
O
E
X
T
I
E
D
U
TO
A
U
A
L
E
V
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
E
T
O
2
H-
-
+
MA
C
EM
NU
PU
R
AU
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
AF
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
C
T
GA
O
IN
FF
W
HIT
E
B
AL
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
When you set the camcorder to Full Auto mode
(page 51), Auto Shutter is forcibly selected.
When Full Auto mode is off, you can
IL
CA
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
independently turn Auto Shutter mode on by
setting “Auto Shutter” to “On” with “TLCS”
(page 120) of the CAMERA SET menu.
Recording in Auto Iris Mode
When the camcorder is in Full Auto mode (page
51), Auto Iris mode is forcibly turned on.
When Full Auto mode is off, you can turn it on by
setting the IRIS switch to AUTO.
You can select the target level (to make the
picture brighter or darker) of the Auto Iris control.
(The gain control in AGC mode and the shutter
speed control in Auto Shutter mode are adjusted
in synchronization.)
To adjust the target level with the Setup menu
CAMERA SET menu.
Adjusting the Iris
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the target level with the Direct menu
The target level can also be selected using the
Direct menu.
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button, the current setting is displayed on the
screen.
Adjusting the Zoom
You can adjust the zoom in Manual mode or
Power (Servo) mode on the supplied lens.
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
Manual Zoom mode
ND
1
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000CH1
CH2
++
Rotate the zoom ring to adjust the zoom.
You can change the setting with the Direct menu
by operating the joystick or the jog dial.
Power Zoom (Servo) mode
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
You can adjust the zoom by pressing the power
zoom lever or zoom button on the handle.
The supplied IR Remote Commander and
optional lens remote controller can also be used.
Note
Auto Iris motions may be different among lenses.
Adjust the “Speed” setting of “TLCS” (page 120)
on the CAMERA SET menu if needed.
The current zoom position is displayed on the
screen in the range of 0 (Wide) to 99 (Tele) when
you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO button.
Adjusting the Iris Manually
120min STBY
A: 25min
B: 50min
Z99
STBY
Set the IRIS switch to MANU to adjust the iris
manually.
Rotate the iris ring for the desired iris opening.
The numerical indication can be changed to that
in a bar by changing the “Zoom Position” setting
menu.
120min STBY
A: 25min
STBY
B: 50min
W
T
Switching the Zoom Mode
Switching between Manual mode and Servo
mode is performed with the ZOOM switch
located on the bottom of the camcorder.
Adjusting the Zoom
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zoom speed switch
ZOOM button
Power zoom lever
T
H
IG
R
B
T
S
A
R
T
N
O
C
A
R
G
B
E
IN
Z
K
A
E
P
FO
IN
T
A
T
/B
A
Y
PL
IS
D
E
AG
IM
R
O
R
N
IR
O
REC
START/STOP
M
F
F
O
O
F
F
L
H
l
P
R
j
E
F
V
R
E
V
s
T
G
P
U
H
S
/
Y
A
L
N
A
M
L
A
P
/
I L
U
J
S
E
S
O
N
M
E
L
T
I
F
E
S
/
O
R
F
T
W
V
D
O
C
L
A
N
C
E
L
R
N
I O
T
A
R U
/ D
T
I
- B
U
/
C
T
CH
-1
N
O
O
B
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
R
S
T
AU
DI
O
I
N
A
CH
-2
MI
LIN
C
HOLD
E
S
M
IC
+4
8V
T
S
R
O
A
T
P
E
R
M
IC
T
L
INE
D
/
C
MI
I
C+
48
N
V
E
R
L
F
A
N
E
X
E
O
A
C
P
S
U
S
D
E
M
O
D
V E
R
N
E
I
E
W
C
O
I
T
U
O
R
T
S
V
I
D
E
O
H
L
OFF
CH
-1
AU
C
H-2
DI
O
OU
T
CO
MP
ON
EN
OU
T
T
T
H
IG
R
B
T
S
A
R
T
N
O
C
A
R
G
B
E
IN
Z
K
A
E
P
FO
ZOOM
MANU SERVO
IN
T
A
T
/B
A
Y
PL
IS
D
E
AG
IM
R
RO
N
IR
O
M
F
F
O
O
F
F
L
H
l
P
R
E
j
V
R
F
E
V
s
T
G
P
U
H
ZOOM switch
S
/
A
L
M
Y
N
A
L
/
I L
A
P
U
J
S
E
S
O
N
M
E
L
I T
F
E
S
/
O
R
F
T
W
D
V
O
C
L
A
N
C
E
L
R
N
O
I
T
A
R U D
/
T
I
B -
U
/
C
T
CH
-1
N
O
O
B
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
R
S
T
AU
DIO IN
A
CH
-2
MI
LIN
C
E
S
M
IC
+4
8V
T
S
R
O
A
T
P
E
R
M
IC
T
L
INE
D
C
/
MI
I
C+
48
N
V
E
R
L
F
A
N
E
X
E
O
A
C
P
S
U
S
D
E
M
O
D
V E
R
N
E
I
E
W
C
O
I
T
U
O
R
T
S
V
I
D
E
O
CH
-1
AU
C
H-2
DI
O
O
UT
CO
MP
ON
EN
OU
T
T
Operating the Zoom Manually
Setting the ZOOM switch to the MANU position
for Manual Zoom mode activates the zoom ring.
Rotate the zoom ring to adjust the zoom.
ZOOM
MANU SERVO
ZOOM switch:
SERVO
Full
MF
AF
IRIS
To adjust with the power zoom lever on
the grip
MANU AUTO
MACRO
OPEN
OFF ON
FOCUS
CLOSE
Press the W (wide) side for a wider angle or the T
(telephoto) side for a closer angle.
MANU AUTO
PUSH AF
Pressing the lever deeper sets zooming faster.
Zoom ring
To adjust with the ZOOM button on the
handle
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
AF
A
Fu
ll
S
S
T
H
E
T
R
S
H
MF
.2
AD
OT
ANS OT
ITI
Y
B
1
ON
Press the W side for a wider angle or the T side for
a closer angle.
Zooming is activated at the speed selected with
the speed switch.
8
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
m
40
T
U
O
I
D
IR
IS
S
9
.
5
2
1
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
2
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
CK
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
S
O
IN
EX
SI
2
G
N
6
.
T
NLO
0
E
G
5
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
2
A
U
D
C
T
A
S
I
N
C
1
T
E
IO
V
EX
D
U
TO
A
U
A
L
E
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
2
TE
O
EM
-
H-
MA
C
NU
PU
R
AU
AF
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
F
RA
O
M
E
+
U
T
O
TC
GA
O
IN
FF
W
HI
TE
B
AL
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
The zoom speed assignment can be changed with
the CAMERA SET menu.
ZOOM
MANU SERVO
ZOOM switch:
MANU
Speed
switch
H
ZOOM button operation
Zoom changes with the speed set by
“High” of “Zoom Speed” of CAMERA
SET menu. (Default: 70)
L
Zoom changes with the speed set by
“Low” of “Zoom Speed” of CAMERA
SET menu. (Default: 30)
Using the Power Zoom
Setting the ZOOM switch to the SERVO position
for Servo mode activates the power zoom.
OFF
Disabled
In Servo mode, the power zoom lever on the grip
and the ZOOM button on the handle are activated.
Adjusting the Zoom
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
If you set “Zoom Speed (High/Low)” of the
CAMERA SET menu to a value between 0 and 9
for a low speed, zooming may not operate
smoothly, depending on the individual
characteristics of the lens or operating
environments.
Adjusting the Focus
You can select any of three modes for focus
adjustments on the supplied lens.
When adjusting with the ZOOM button of
the IR Remote Commander
Full MF (Full Manual Focus) mode
Only adjustment with the focus ring is effective in
this mode.
You can adjust the focus from ∞ to the minimum
length by rotating the ring. The ring rotates
endlessly in the both directions.
The zooming speed depends on the “Remote”
setting (default: 50) of “Zoom Speed” of the
CAMERA SET menu.
Note
If you set “Zoom Speed (Remote)” of the
CAMERA SET menu to a value between 0 and 9
for a low speed, zooming may not operate
smoothly, depending on the individual
characteristics of the lens or operating
environments.
MF (Manual Focus) mode
In this mode, auto focus can be temporarily
activated by pushing the PUSH AF button.
The MF Assist function can be used for
assistance.
To use the IR Remote Commander, see “Using the IR
AF (Auto Focus) mode
Auto focus functions continuously in this mode.
The focus ring and the PUSH AF button can also
be used.
When using a lens remote controller
Zooming can also be controlled from an optional
lens remote controller connected via the LENS
REMOTE connector.
Note
The infinity position has some margin to
compensate for focus change caused by variation
in ambient temperature. When shooting an image
at infinity in MF or Full MF mode, adjust the
focus while observing the image in the
viewfinder.
For operation of the optional lens remote controller,
refer to the operation guide of the lens remote
controller.
Adjusting in Full MF Mode
Pull the focus ring rearward (toward the
camcorder body) to set the camcorder to Full MF
mode. Focus can only be adjusted with the focus
ring manually.
Note
The focus instantly moves to the range index
position when you pull the focus ring rearward.
Adjusting the Focus
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peaking
When you turn the PEAKING control from its
left-end position, the peaking function is
activated. This function emphasizes the contours
of the images in the viewfinder, making manual
focusing easier.
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
AF
A
Fu
ll
S
T
E
T
R
S
H
MF
.2
AD
OT
ANS OT
ITI
ON
Y
B
1
S
H
8
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
m
40
T
U
O
IR
DI
S
IS
9
.
5
1
2
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
2
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
O
IN
EX
K
SI
S
C
2
G
N
6
.
T
NLO
1
E
G
5
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
2
A
UD
E
C
T
IN
A
S
I
N
C
1
T
IO
V
EX
D
U
TO
A
U
A
L
E
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
2
TE
O
-
+
H-
MA
C
EM
NU
PU
R
AU
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
AF
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
C
T
GA
O
IN
FF
W
HIT
E
BA
L
L
The emphasis level is increased by turning the
control clockwise.
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
This function does not affect recording signals.
FULL
MF
STEADY
SHOT
AF
PEAKING control
IRIS
MANU AUTO
MACRO
OFF ON
FOCUS
PEAKING
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
ZEBRA
MANU AUTO
PUSH AF
MIRROR IMAGE DISPLAY/BATT INFO
OFF
ON
Range index
Focus ring: Rearward
T
H
IG
R
B
T
S
A
R
T
N
O
C
A
R
G
B
E
IN
Z
K
A
E
P
FO
IN
A
T
T
A
Y
/B
PL
IS
D
E
AG
IM
R
O
R
N
IR
O
M
F
F
O
O
F
F
L
H
l
P
R
j
E
F
V
R
E
V
s
T
G
P
U
H
L
M
S
/
Y
A
N
A
L
/
A
P
L I
U
J
S
E
S
M
O
N
E
/ S
L
T
I
F
E
O
R
F
T
W
V
D
O
C
L
A
N
C
Rotate the focus ring for the best focus while
observing the picture in the viewfinder.
The range index of the focus ring is effective in
Full MF mode. The distances correspond to the
focus ring positions.
E
L
R
N
I O
A
T
R U D
I T B -
/ U
/
C
T
CH
-1
N
O
O
B
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
R
S
T
AU
DIO IN
A
CH
-2
MI
LIN
C
E
S
M
IC
+4
8V
T
S
R
O
A
T
P
E
R
M
IC
T
L
INE
D
/
C
MI
I
C+
48
N
V
E
R
L
F
A
N
E
X
E
O
A
C
P
S
U
S
D
E
M
D
O
V E
C
I
E
R
N
W
E
O
I
T
U
O
R
T
S
V
I
D
E
O
CH
-1
AU
C
H-
DIO
2
O
UT
CO
MP
ON
EN
OU
T
T
Expanded Focus
When you press the EXPANDED FOCUS
button, the center area of the picture is magnified
in the viewfinder, making the focus adjustment
easier.
Press the EXPANDED FOCUS button again or
leave the focus ring untouched for 5 seconds to
resume the normal angle for recording.
The color of the contours can be set with
Turning the control back to its left stop position
deactivates the peaking function.
Adjusting in MF Mode
S
T
S
O
T
P
A
R
T
/
Slide the focus ring forward (toward the lens
hood) and set the FOCUS switch to MANU to set
the camcorder to MF mode. In this mode, you can
activate Auto Focus only when required.
R E L E A S E
R
R
E
E
V
E
I
W
C
F
A
N
E
X
O
C
P
U
S
D
E
D
EXPANDED
FOCUS
button
T
H
IG
R
B
T
S
A
R
T
N
O
C
A
R
G
B
E
IN
Z
K
A
E
P
FO
IN
A
T
T
A
Y
/B
PL
IS
D
E
AG
IM
R
O
R
N
IR
O
M
F
F
O
O
F
F
L
H
l
P
R
j
E
F
V
R
E
V
s
T
G
P
U
H
S
/
Y
A
L
N
A
M
L
A
P
/
L I
U
J
S
E
S
O
N
M
E
L
I T
F
E
S
/
O
R
F
T
W
V
D
O
C
L
A
N
C
E
L
R
N
I O
T
A
R U
I T / D
- B
/ U
C
T
CH
-1
N
O
O
B
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
R
S
T
AU
DIO IN
A
CH
-2
MI
LIN
C
E
S
M
IC
+4
8V
T
S
R
O
A
T
P
E
R
M
IC
T
L
INE
D
/
C
MI
I
C+
48
N
V
E
R
L
F
A
N
E
X
E
O
A
C
P
S
U
S
D
E
M
O
D
V E
R
N
E
I
E
W
C
O
I
T
U
O
R
T
S
V
I
D
E
O
CH
-1
AU
C
H-2
DI
O
O
UT
CO
MP
ON
EN
OU
T
T
Adjusting the Focus
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TLCS
.
7
∗
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
M
F
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
ATW 4300K PPOFF ND
1
AF
A
Fu
ll
S
T
E
T
R
S
H
MF
A
D
OT
ANS OT
ITI
ON
Y
B
1.2
S
H
8
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
m
40
UT
O
I
D
IR
IS
S
9
.
5
1
2
LE
NS
In MF mode, you can activate/deactivate the MF
Assist function with the Direct menu by operating
the joystick or the jog dial.
When the function is active, an asterisk mark is
displayed to the right of the mode indication.
IN
FO
0
.8
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
2
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
CK
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
O
S
IN
EX
SI
2
G
N
6
.
T
NLO
1
E
G
5
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
TC
2
A
U
D
A
I
N
C
1
T
E
IO
V
S
EX
D
U
TO
A
U
A
L
E
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
2
TE
O
-
+
H-
MA
NU
SH
C
M
RE
AU
AF
FU
PU
TO
LL
A
UT
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
TC
GA
O
IN
FF
W
HI
TE
BA
L
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
FULL
MF
STEADY
SHOT
AF
Note
IRIS
MANU AUTO
MACRO
The Direct menu cannot be selected in a mode
other than MF mode.
OFF ON
FOCUS
PUSH AF
button
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
MANU AUTO
PUSH AF
FOCUS switch:
MANU
Focus ring: Forward
Adjusting in AF Mode
Slide the focus ring forward (toward the lens
hood) and set the FOCUS switch to AUTO to set
the camcorder to AF mode. In this mode, focus is
always adjusted automatically.
Adjusting the focus with the focus ring
Rotate the focus ring for the best focus while
observing the picture in the viewfinder.
The range index of the ring is invalid in MF
mode.
FULL
STEADY
SHOT
AF
MF
IRIS
MANU AUTO
MACRO
One-Push (Momentary) Auto Focusing
OFF ON
FOCUS
Push the PUSH AF button. Auto focusing
momentarily activates (One-Push Auto
Focusing).
MANU AUTO
PUSH AF
One-Push Auto Focusing is terminated when the
subject comes in focus.
FOCUS switch:
AUTO
Focus ring: Forward
MF Assist function
The range index of the ring is invalid in AF mode.
When you stop rotating the focus ring with the
MF Assist function active, auto focusing starts,
performing fine focus adjustment for the subject
in the center of the screen. When the fine
adjustment is completed, automatic focusing with
the MF Assist function is terminated.
Focusing in AF mode
In AF mode the camcorder continuously checks
changes of images and activates auto focusing
each time it detects a change. The auto focus
adjustment is terminated when the subject comes
into focus, and the camcorder stands by until the
next change is detected.
In AF mode, auto focusing is also activated when
you press the PUSH AF button or operate the
focus ring.
Activating the MF Assist function using the
CAMERA SET menu
SET menu to “On.”
Activating the MF Assist function using the Direct
menu
The current focus adjustment mode is displayed
on the screen when you press the DISPLAY/
BATT INFO button.
Adjusting the Focus
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Macro Mode
Eliminating Picture
When you set the MACRO switch to ON in AF or
MF mode, Macro mode is activated, permitting
you to adjust the focus in a range that includes the
micro area.
Blurring (Steady Shot)
By activating the Steady Shot function of the
supplied lens, blurring of images due to camera
shaking can be reduced.
The Macro mode is invalid in Full MF mode.
FULL
STEADY
SHOT
AF
MF
IRIS
Press the STEADY SHOT button on the
lens.
MANU AUTO
MACRO
OFF ON
FOCUS
Pressing the button turns the Steady Shot function
ON or OFF.
MANU AUTO
PUSH AF
MACRO switch
STEADY SHOT button
FULL
STEADY
SHOT
AF
MF
IRIS
MANU AUTO
MACRO
OFF ON
FOCUS
MANU AUTO
PUSH AF
The setting of the Steady Shot function is
displayed in the viewfinder.
TLCS
.
7
∗
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
M
F
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
ATW 4300K PPOFF ND
1
Note
If the camcorder is fixed to a tripod for stable
condition, deactivate the Steady Shot function.
Eliminating Picture Blurring (Steady Shot)
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The recommended “Mode” settings are shown
below.
Reducing Flickers
Flicker
Reduce/
Mode
Environments
Under lighting Under lighting
that may cause that does not
flicker
Recommended
cause flicker
Acceptable
To reduce flickers, try either of the following two
methods:
Auto
On
Acceptable
Not recommended
Recommended
Off
Not recommended
Setting the shutter speed according to
the power-supply frequency
the shutter speed according to the power supply
frequency.
When the frequency is 50 Hz
1
1
1
Set the shutter speed to / or
/
seconds.
seconds.
50
100
120
When the frequency is 60 Hz
1
Set the shutter speed to / or
/
60
Using the Flicker-Reduction function
the CAMERA SET menu to “Auto” or “On” and
set “Frequency” to the power-supply frequency
(50 Hz or 60 Hz).
Note
If the frame rate selected for recording is close to
the power-supply frequency, flicker may not be
reduced sufficiently even if you activate the
Flicker-Reduction function. In such cases, use the
electronic shutter.
Recommended settings for flicker reduction
Frequency
Alway set “Frequency” to the power-supply
frequency value appropriate for the shooting area.
Mode
• It is recommended to set “Mode” to “Off” when
shooting outdoors or under lighting that does
not cause flicker. (It can be also “Auto,” but the
compensation may not be done properly.)
• It is recommended to set “Mode” to “Auto”
when shooting indoors or under various lighting
that may cause flicker, such as fluorescent,
sodium, or mercury-vapor lamps. (If
continuously shooting under lighting that may
cause flicker, “Mode” should be set to “On.”)
Reducing Flickers / Reducing Flickers
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Timecode
Setting the Time Data
Specify the timecode to be recorded with
“Timecode” and “TC Format” of the TC/UB SET
menu.
Time data, such as the timecodes, user bits, and
the clock time, are recorded with pictures.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
The timecode can be locked to an external timecode
generator. For details, see “External
TC/UB SET
B
Ti
mecode
Mode
: Preset
B
U
sers B i t
Run
: Rec Run
TC For
m
at : DF Set t i ng : 00:00:00:00
eset
00:00
Running Modes of the Timecode
R
For the timecode, three running modes and Clock
mode can be selected.
Setting the timecode to a desired value
Rec Run mode
1
2
Set “Mode” of “Timecode” to “Preset.”
The timecode advances during recording only.
The continuity of the timecode is maintained
between clips in the sequence of recording as long
as the SxS memory card is not changed.
Specify the timecode value on the
Setting line and select “SET.”
If you remove the memory card and record on
another card, the timecode will not continue when
you return the first card to the slot again.
Resetting the timecode
You can reset the timecode to be recorded in
running modes to “00:00:00:00.”
Free Run mode
1
2
Select “Reset” of “Timecode.”
Select “Execute.”
The timecode keeps advancing regardless of
recording.
Regen mode
Using the actual time as the timecode
The timecode advances during recording only.
When you insert another memory card, the
camcorder starts next recording so that the
timecode continues to the last recorded timecode
on the card.
Set “Mode” of “Timecode” to “Clock.”
The time of the built-in clock is recorded as the
timecode.
Switching between DF and NDF of the
timecode
Clock mode
Using “TC Format” of the TC/UB SET menu, DF
(drop-frame mode) and NDF (non-drop frame
mode) of the timecode can be switched.
Note, however, that the mode is fixed either to DF
or NDF regardless of the TC Format setting,
depending on the current frame-rate setting.
The current clock time is recorded for the
timecode.
Note
In Interval Recording, Frame Recording, Slow &
Quick Motion Recording, the timecode advances
in Rec Run mode regardless of the “Run” setting
if you set “Mode” of “Timecode” to “Preset” with
the TC/UB SET menu.
Restrictions on the timecode
The timecode setting is restricted by the current
video format.
If you set it to “Clock,” the timecode advances in
Regen mode.
Setting the Time Data
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video
formats
Frame
setting
TC Format
TC/UB SET
B
B
Ti
m
ecode
HQ1080/60i 00 to 29
SP 1080/60i
HQ1080/30P
DF/NDF switchable
(Fixed to DF in Clock
mode)
U
sers B i t
Mode
: Fix
TC Format : DF Set t i ng : 20 07 12 08
00:00
HQ 1080/50i 00 to 24
SP 1080/50i
Fixed to NDF
HQ 1080/25P
1)
3)
2)
HQ 1080/24P
HQ 720/24P
00 to 23
00 to 29
Fixed to NDF
Setting eight digits as desired
SP 1080/24P
DF/NDF switchable
(Fixed to DF in Clock
mode)
1
2
Set “Mode” of “Users Bit” to “Fix.”
HQ 720/60P 00 to 29
DF/NDF switchable
Specify the values on the Setting line
and select “SET.”
(double count) (Fixed to DF in Clock
mode)
You can set hexadecimal digits A to F with
the corresponding alphabetics.
HQ 720/50P 00 to 24
(double count)
HQ 720/30P 00 to 29
Fixed to NDF
DF/NDF switchable
(Fixed to DF in Clock
mode)
Recording the current date as the user
bits
HQ 720/25P 00 to 24
Fixed to NDF
Set “Mode” of “Users Bit” to “Date.”
1)The frame digits in “Setting” are limited to 00, 04, 08,
12, 16, and 20.
The current date is displayed on the Setting line.
The frame at the beginning of recording is limited to
00, 04, 08, 12, 16, and 20.
As the SDI OUT connector output becomes 60i
because of the 2-3 pull-down process except when
“24PsF” for 1080/24P in Camera mode, the frame
digits of the timecode added to the SDI OUT
connector output are changed to values in the range of
00 to 29.
Displaying the Time Data
In Camera mode, pressing the DISPLAY/BATT
INFO button displays the time data on the screen.
T
REC
TCG 00:00:00:00
1080/24P
H
Q
2)Even in Clock mode, the timecode is gradually
shifted, because it is counted by NDF.
As any output becomes 2-3 pulled-down video except
those from the SDI OUT and COMPONENT OUT
129) set to “24PsF” for 1080/24P in Camera mode,
there may be a field that has dual timecodes on the
display.
3)With DF, the frame digits can be set as desired in the
range of 00 to 29.
With NDF, the frame at the beginning of recording is
limited to 00, 05, 10, 15, 20, and 25.
The indication is switched among the timecode,
user bits, and recording duration each time you
press the TC/U-BIT/DURATION button.
Display
Contents
TCG **:**:**:** Tmecode
CLK **:**:**:** Timecode (Clock mode)
UBG ** ** ** ** User bits
DUR **:**:**
Duration from the beginning of
recording
Setting the User Bits
You can add a hexadecimal number of 8 digits for
pictures as the user bits.
The user bits can also be set to the current date.
Use “Users Bit” of the TC/UB SET menu.
Setting the Time Data
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using External Inputs
Recording Audio Signals
1
Set the AUDIO IN switches CH-1 and
CH-2 to EXT.
2
3
Connect external audio sources to the
AUDIO IN connectors CH-1 and CH-2.
Two channels (CH-1/CH-2) of audio can be
recorded (Linear PCM recording) in
synchronization with video recording.
You can use the built-in stereo microphones
(omni-directional electret condenser
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V switches CH-1
and CH-2 to LINE (line level: +4 dBu).
microphones) or 2-channel external audio inputs
to the AUDIO IN connectors by switching with
the AUDIO IN switches.
Using an External Microphone
You can use an external microphone for
recording, such as the ECM-673 Electret
Condenser Microphone.
AUDIO IN
connectors:
To input external
sources
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-2
1
Loosen the screw of the microphone
holder and open the cover.
MIC
MIC
LINE
MIC+48V LINE
MIC+48V
LINE/MIC/+48V
switches:
To select the type
external source
P
O
F
IN
T
T
A
/B
Y
A
L
P
IS
D
E
G
A
IM
R
O
R
N
O
IR
M
Built-in stereo
microphones
F
F
O
O
F
F
l
P
R
j
H
E
O
V
F
R
L
D
E
V
s
S
T
T O
H
T
A
G
P
U
P
/
S
L
M
R
A
T
R
L
Y
N
A
L
/ S
P
/
E
I L
T
C
N
A
O
U
E
S
E
M
P
X
J
S
E
O
N
T
L
I T
O
/ S
F
F
E
R
T
W
V
D
O
L
C
A
N
C
E
L
R
R
L
CANCE
OR
L
D
T
W
ONITVO
F
F
M
L/SE
SE
E
S
U
A
/P
Y
A
L
P
T
L
NEX
/
HUMNAIL
T
OP
U
/
ST
P
O
C
T
F
REV
C
T
/S
T
E
R
REV
R
P
A
T
S
N
D
L
O
H
B
O
O
I
T
H
I
S
N
T
A
R
S
T
A
C
H
-2
M
1
6
IC
:9
L
IN
W
ID
E
E
S
C
R
E
E
S
N
M
IC
T
S
R
O
T
+
48
A
P
E
V
M
IC
R
T
L
IN
/
E
M
IC
+
4
8
V
E
R
L
E
X
E
F
O
A
C
P
S
A
U
N
B
S
D
E
D
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
E
V
t
R
f
m
I
E
E
40
W
m
T
U
O
I
SD
IR
IS
9
.
5
2
1
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
2
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
O
IN
EX
K
SI
S
C
2
G
N
6
.
T
NLO
1
E
G
5
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
TC
2
A
U
D
A
S
I
N
C
1
T
E
IO
V
EX
D
U
TO
A
U
A
L
E
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
E
T
O
2
-
+
H-
MA
C
EM
NU
PU
R
AU
AF
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
C
T
O
GA
O
IN
FF
W
HIT
E
BA
L
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
2
Attach a microphone, close the
microphone holder cover for the
original condition to secure, then
connect the microphone cable to either
of the AUDIO IN connectors (CH-1 or
CH-2).
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
AUTO
MANUAL
INT
EXT
CH-1
AUDIO
LEVEL
AUDIO
SELECT
AUDIO
IN
AUTO
MANUAL
INT
EXT
CH-2
AUDIO IN switches:
To select the source
AUDIO SELECT switches:
To select the recording level
adjustment mode
AUDIO LEVEL controls:
To adjust the recording levels
Using the Built-in Stereo
Microphones
Set the AUDIO IN switches, both CH-1 and
CH-2, to INT.
Recording Audio Signals
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
P
O
F
IN
T
T
A
/B
Y
A
L
P
IS
D
E
G
A
IM
R
O
R
N
O
IR
M
F
F
O
O
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
F
F
L
l
P
2
R
H
E
CH1
CH2
V
T
S
H
T
A
G
U
R
P
S
/
A
M
++
ND F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
T
R
Y
N
L
/ S
P
/
A
E
I L
1
C
N
A
U
E
S
E
M
X
J
S
E
O
N
T
L / S
I T
O
F
F
E
R
T
W
V
D
O
L
C
A
N
C
E
L
N
O
I
T
A
R
U
D
/
T
I
B -
U
/
C
T
C
H
-1
N
B
O
O
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
R
T
A
U
S
D
IO
IN
A
C
H
-2
Audio recording in special recording
modes
S T
M
IC
S T
A R
O P
+
48V
M
T /
IC
LIN
E
M
IC
+48
R E
V
4
External
microphone
• No audio recording is made in Interval
Recording or Frame Recording.
to AUDIO IN
• No audio recording is made in Slow & Quick
recording if the recording frame rate is set to a
value different from the playback frame rate.
Cable clamp
3
Monitoring the Audio
You can monitor the sounds being recorded with
the headphones connected to the headphone
connector (stereo mini jack).
3
4
Set the corresponding AUDIO IN
switch (CH-1 or CH-2) to EXT.
Set the corresponding LINE/MIC/+48V
switch (CH-1 or CH-2) according to the
connected microphone.
Headphone
connector
MIC: For a microphone that requires no
power supply
+48V: For a microphone that requires +48V
power supply (such as the ECM-673)
MONITOR VOL buttons
MONITOR VOL
Adjusting the Audio Recording
Levels
MONIT
THUMNAIL
OR
V
OL
SEL/SET
F
REV
PLA
Y/P
AU
CANCEL
PREV
S
E
F
FWD
/
ST
OP
NEXT
ST
AR REC
T/ST
OP
H
O
L
F
F
H
OLD
-2
CH
IN
DIO
A
U
CH-1
MI
C
+48V
MI
IC
M
E
LIN
V
C
+48
M
IC
E
LIN
R
E
LE
A
S
E
You can select automatic or manual adjustment
mode independently for each channel.
H
D
T
V
R
A
A
S
S
T
N
S
H
D
T
I
I
O
O
I
O
U
N
B
T
C
T
U
/
B -
T
I
D
/
U
R
T
A
O
I
N
G
E
N
T
L
O
C
IN
C
K
IN
R
E
M
O
T
E
T
C
O
U
T
LOCK
To adjust the levels automatically (AGC)
DC
M
IN
ON
OU
ITO
T
RELEASE
R
S
VID
EO
T
EN
N
T
PO
M
O
C
U
O
-
2
H
C
T
U
O
-
1
IO
D
H
C
AU
When the AUDIO SELECT switches CH-1 and
CH-2 are set to AUTO, the audio recording levels
are automatically adjusted.
Note
The built-in speaker is disabled in Camera mode.
To adjust the levels manually
To adjust the audio monitoring volume
Use the MONITOR VOL buttons.
Pressing the + button increases the volume, and
pressing the – button decreases it. To muffle the
sound, set it to the minimum level.
Set the AUDIO SELECT switches CH-1 and CH-
2 to MANUAL, and adjust the audio recording
levels by turning the AUDIO LEVEL controls.
The value is set to 0 dB when the control is set to
5. Setting to 10 maximizes the level (+12 dB) and
setting to 0 minimizes it (–∞).
While you adjust the volume, the level is
displayed as a bar on the screen.
The input levels are displayed on the screen when
you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO button.
Recording Audio Signals
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The color bar mode cannot be selected in Slow
& Quick Motion mode and EX Slow Shutter
mode.
Outputting the Color
Bars and Reference
Tone
The camcorder can output a color-bar signal in
place of the camera picture.
A 1-kHz reference tone is output with the color
bar signal if “1kHz Tone” of “Audio Input” (page
121) is set to “On” with the AUDIO SET menu.
The color-bar signal is also fed out from the SDI
OUT, COMPONENT OUT, MONITOR OUT
and S VIDEO connectors, and the reference-tone
signal is fed from the AUDIO OUT connectors.
R
EL
R
CANC
O
IT
ON VO
D
L
ET
EL/S
F
FW
M
E
S
U
A
P
S
L
IL
NA
/
Y
A
L
P
NEXT
/
THUM
OP
ST
P
O
T
F
REV
C
E
/S
R
T
R
A
PREV
T
S
D
L
O
H
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
B
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
40
m
UT
O
I
D
IR
IS
S
9
.
5
1
2
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
2
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
O
IN
EX
K
SI
S
C
O
2
G
N
6
.
T
NL
1
E
G
5
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
TC
2
A
U
D
A
I
N
C
1
T
E
IO
V
S
EX
D
U
TO
A
U
A
L
E
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
E
T
O
2
-
+
H-
MA
C
EM
NU
PU
R
AU
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
AF
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
GA
TC
O
IN
FF
W
HIT
E
B
AL
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
-
FULL AUTO
FRAME
+
GAIN
L
WHITE BAL BARS/CAM
ATW
B
M
A
BARS/CAM button
H
PAST
Press the BARS/CAM button.
The camera picture is switched to color bars.
To return to the camera picture, press the button
again.
You can select the type of color bars with “Color
menu.
Multi: ARIB multiformat color bars
75%: Vertical stripes of 75% luminance
100%: Vertical stripes of 100% luminance
Notes
• When recording of the camera image is in
progress, it cannot be switched to the color-bar
picture even if you press the BARS/CAM
button. (You can switch the color-bar picture to
the camera picture.)
Outputting the Color Bars and Reference Tone
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Shot Marks
Rec Review
When you record shot marks for important scenes
as subsidiary data, you can access the marked
points easily on a Shot Mark screen, which only
displays scenes with shot marks only. This
increases editing efficiency.
You can review the last recorded clip on the
screen (Rec Review).
Use the REC REVIEW button on the supplied
lens or assign the Rec Review function to an
For the Shot Mark Screen, see “Displaying the
S
T
S
O
T
P
A
R
T
/
R E L E A S E
R
R
E
E
V
E
I
W
C
The camcorder permits you to record two types of
shot marks: shot mark 1 and shot mark 2.
Shot marks can be recorded as needed during
recording or can be added after recording while
checking the playback pictures.
F
A
N
E
X
O
C
P
U
S
D
E
D
REC REVIEW
button
T
H
IG
R
B
T
S
A
R
T
N
O
C
A
R
G
B
E
IN
Z
K
A
E
P
FO
IN
T
A
T
/B
Inserting a shot mark during recording
A
Y
PL
IS
D
E
AG
IM
R
O
R
N
IR
O
M
F
F
O
O
F
F
L
H
l
P
R
j
E
F
V
R
E
V
s
T
G
P
U
H
S
/
Y
A
L
N
A
M
L
A
P
/
L I
U
J
S
E
S
O
N
M
E
F
E
/ S
L
O
R
T
I
F
T
W
V
D
O
C
L
A
N
C
E
L
R
N
I O
T
A
R U D
/
T
I
B -
U
/
C
T
CH
-1
N
O
O
B
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
R
S
T
AU
DIO IN
A
CH
-2
and use the SHOTMARK 1 or 2 button.
MI
LIN
C
E
S
M
IC
+4
8V
T
S
R
O
A
T
P
E
R
M
IC
T
L
INE
D
/
C
MI
I
C+
48
N
V
E
R
L
F
A
N
E
X
E
O
A
C
P
S
U
S
D
E
M
D
O
V E
C
R
N
W
E
I
E
O
I
T
U
O
R
T
S
V
I
D
E
O
CH
-1
AU
C
H-2
DI
O
O
UT
CO
MP
PUSH SET
ON
EN
OU
T
T
1
SHOTMARK
2
T
ZOOM
W
SHOTMARK 1 button
SHOTMARK 2 button
THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP
PREV
PLAY/PAUSE
NEXT
STOP
After recording is finished, press the REC
REVIEW button or the assignable button to
which you assigned the Rec Review
function.
.
u
>
x
Press the SHOTMARK 1 or 2 button where
you wish to insert a mark.
Playback of the specified block of the clip begins.
In Rec Review, the last 3 seconds, 10 seconds, or
the entire part of the clip is displayed, depending
CAMERA SET menu. It is set to 3 seconds at the
factory.
If the Shot Mark1 or Shot Mark2 function is
assigned to an assignable button, you can also use
A shot mark of the type corresponding to the
button you press is recorded.
Rec Review is terminated at the end of the clip,
resuming STBY (recording standby) status.
For operations to add shot marks after recording,
Notes
• If the duration of the last recorded clip is less
than the time (3 or 10 seconds) specified for Rec
Review, the clip is played back from the
beginning to the end.
• During Rec Review playback, only the STOP
button is valid.
When the STOP button is pressed, Rec Review
is canceled, and the camcorder returns to STBY
(recording standby) status.
Recording Shot Marks / Rec Review
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the video format is changed after recording,
Rec Review cannot be performed.
• The Setup and PICTURE PROFILE menus
cannot be operated during Rec Review.
Changing Functions of
the Assignable Buttons
The camcorder has four assignable buttons to
which you can assign various functions for
convenience.
ASSIGN 1 to 3 buttons
LENS INFO BRT DISP HISTOGRAM
ASSIGN
1
2
3
O
C
T
P
S
R
/
T
R
P
T
X E
L
E
A
T
S
EAK
IN
G
N
s
D
J
P
O
W
F
T
S
F
S
/
CO
NT
L
E
E S
l
C N
U
A
G
V E
R
AS
A
C
R
P
/
Y
R
P
T
A
L
T
E S
P
V E
j
B
RIG
/
L
R
H
T
E S
F
MI
L I
RRO
F
L
A
N
R
IM
A
O
V
M
U H
GE
O
T
T
O
F
I
N
D
ISP
O
L
A
M
Y
ON
/BA
T
IN
TT
IN
FO
T
X
ZE
E
BR
A
O
I
D
U
N
O
L
T
A
T
E
U
U
IN
A
N
A
I
T
X
A
M
T
SELECT
O
I
T
C
O
L
D
T
A
U
SLO
U
E
U
A
N
A
A
L
1
E
S
-
M
H
C
O
I
L
D
E
E
U
V
A
AM
GR
2
-
H
TO
S
L
3
X
E
HIS
S
E
C
B
N
ISP
SIG
C
T
BR
D
AS
FO
IN
C
NS
LE
A
-
A
3
W
2
M
1
D
Y
O
P
EA
SH
1 . 9
ST
T
8
.
2
ND
ER
L
T
FI
4
TO
AU
L
F
UL
ll
M
F
u
. 6
2
F
5
EN
-
+
P
O
E
M
F
1
F
RA
M
m
8
/
t
f
m
TO
AU
U
N
A
M
6
/CAM
RS
1
BA
0
O
L
R
C
A
0
3
1
BA
TE
M
HI
W
IN
C
GA
B
DI
ME
A
5
5
W
A
O
FF
A
T
A
ER
1
S
T
P
A
L
M
H
C
AM
E
E
UR
CT
IL
ON
PI
O
FF
OF
PR
3
0
1
FOCUS
EL
NC
CA
T
SE
L/
SE
2
7
I
E
NU
M
TO
T
T
US
AU
R
A
ST
W
HT
BA
ON
L
WHT BAL
SHUTTER
OFF ON
ASSIGN
4
ASSIGN 4 button
The following functions are assigned at the
factory:
ASSIGN 1 button (LENS INFO)
Depth-of-field indication on/off
ASSIGN 2 button (BRT DISP)
Brightness-level indication on/off
ASSIGN 3 button (HISTOGRAM)
Histogram indication on/off
ASSIGN 4 button
No function is assigned (Off).
Changing Functions
Use “Assign Button” of the OTHERS menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
1
Select “Assign Button” from the
OTHERS menu.
Changing Functions of the Assignable Buttons
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
75
O
THERS
Al l Reset
era Data
e Zone
Clock Set
Language
Assign But ton
Tal l y
Interval Recording
B
C
Ti
am
m
:
B
UTC +09:00
Engl i sh
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
:
:
:
:
Freeze
M
ark1
ark 2
ix
00:00
Shot
Shot
M
M
:
B
B
Rec Revie
w
The Interval Recording (time-lapse recording)
function is especially effective for shooting
objects that move very slowly.
The specified number of frames are automatically
recorded at the specified intervals.
2
3
Select the button to which you wish to
assign a function.
Select the function to be assigned.
Recording interval (Interval Time)
Function
Contents
Marker
All marker indications (safety-
zone marker, center marker,
aspect marker, guide frames) on/
off
Last Clip DEL Last clip delete
ATW
ATW function on/off
Rec Review
Rec
Rec Review start/stop
Recording start/stop
Freeze Mix
Freeze Mix start/stop
Expanded
Focus
Expanded Focus function on/off
Number of frames for one recording session
(Number of Frames)
Spotlight
Backlight
TLCS Spotlight mode on/off
TLCS Backlight mode on/off
It is recommended to fix the camcorder to a tripod
or equivalent and use the IR Remote Commander
to start/stop recording rather than pressing the
REC START/STOP button of the camcorder.
IR Remote
IR Remote Commander enable/
disable
Shot Mark1
Shot Mark2
Fader
Shot mark 1 insert
Shot mark 2 insert
Notes
Fader on/off
VF Mode
Viewfinder screen mode (color/
monochrome) switching
Brightness level indication on/off
• Interval Recording cannot be set to “On”
simultaneously with Frame Recording or Slow
& Quick Motion. When you set Interval
Recording to “On,” Frame Recording and Slow
& Quick Motion are forcibly set to “Off.”
• No audio recording is executed in Interval
Recording.
BRT Disp
Histogram
Lens Info
Histogram indication on/off
Depth-of-Field indication on/off
4
Exit the menu.
• Interval Recording cannot be performed if an
SP video format is selected with “Video
Format” and “i.LINK I/O” is set to “Enable”
with the OTHERS menu.
The assigned functions can be viewed on the
• Interval Recording cannot be performed if
“Video Format” of the OTHERS menu is set to
SP 1080/24P.
Preparatory Settings
Before starting Interval Recording, make the
necessary settings on the CAMERA SET menu in
advance.
Interval Recording
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
• The Freeze Mix function and Rec Review
function cannot be used in Interval Recording
mode.
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode
(page 69) during Interval Recording.
• Some extra frames may be recorded if you stop
recording or switch the card slot while
recording is halted in Interval Recording mode.
1
Select “Interval Rec” of the CAMERA
SET menu.
C
A
M
E
R
A
SET
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
olor ar Type
F l i cker Reduce
oo peed
I n ter val Rec
Fra e Rec
B
A
:
Of f
C
B
:
Mul t i
B
B
B
B
Stopping Interval Recording
00:00
Z
m
S
Set t ing
Interv al
:
:
Of f
1sec
1
T
i
me
m
Press the REC START/STOP button.
m
Number of Fra
es :
Interval Recording stops.
To restart Interval Recording, press the button
again.
2
Set “Setting” to “On.”
The camcorder enters Interval Recording
mode.
When the special recording mode indication
on the screen is active, “Interval Rec” flashes
on the screen.
Canceling Interval Recording mode
Set “Setting” of “Interval Rec” of the CAMERA
SET menu to “Off.”
Note
3
4
Set the time between recordings with
“Interval Time.”
It automatically returns to “Off” when you set the
power switch to OFF, while the “Interval Time”
and “Number of Frames” settings are maintained.
You can select the time from among 1 to10/
15/20/30/40/50 seconds, 1 to 10/15/20/30/
40/50 minutes, and 1 to 4/6/12/24 hours by
scrolling the display.
Set the number of frames to be recorded
at a time with “Number of Frames.”
“720/60P” or “720/50P,” you can select from
among 2, 6, and 12 frames.
With other settings, you can select from
among 1, 3, 6, and 9 frames.
5
Exit the menu.
Performing Interval Recording
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Interval Recording begins.
The flashing “Interval Rec” on the screen is now
steadily lit.
Notes
• You cannot change the “Interval Time” and
“Number of Frames” settings while Interval
Recording is in progress. To change them,
pause recording.
Interval Recording
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The camcorder enters Frame Recording
mode.
When the special recording mode indication
on the screen is active, “Frame Rec” flashes
on the screen.
Frame Recording
3
4
Select the “Number of Frames” value
for one recording session.
The Frame Recording function is especially
effective for clay animation recording.
The specified number of frames are recorded
intermittently when you press the REC START/
STOP button.
It is recommended to fix the camcorder to a tripod
or equivalent and use the IR Remote Commander
to start/stop recording rather than pressing the
REC START/STOP button of the camcorder.
You can select from among 2, 6, and 12 when
or 720/50P.
With other video formats, you can select
from among 1, 3, 6, and 9.
Exit the menu.
Notes
• Frame Recording cannot be set to “On”
simultaneously with Interval Recording or Slow
& Quick Motion. When you set Frame
Recording to “On,” Interval Recording and
Slow & Quick Motion are forcibly set to “Off.”
• No audio recording is executed in Frame
Recording.
• Frame Recording cannot be performed if an SP
video format is selected with “Video Format”
and “i.LINK I/O” is set to “Enable” with the
OTHERS menu.
Performing Frame Recording
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
1
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Recording in Frame Rec mode begins.
The “Frame Rec” indication stops flashing.
When the number of frames you specified
with the menu are recorded, the camcorder
automatically enters FRM STBY (Frame Rec
Standby) status.
• Frame Recording cannot be performed if
“Video Format” of the OTHERS menu is set to
SP 1080/24P.
2
Press the REC START/STOP button
again.
Each time you press the REC START/STOP
button, the camcorder records the specified
number of frames then enters FRM STBY
status.
Preparatory Settings
Before starting Frame Recording, make the
necessary settings on the CAMERA SET menu in
advance.
Notes
• Recording cannot be stopped until the specified
number of frames are recorded. If the power
switch is set to OFF during recording, the power
is only shut off after the specified number of
frames are recorded.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
1
Select “Frame Rec” of the CAMERA
SET menu.
• The Freeze Mix function and Rec Review
function cannot be used while recording in
Frame Rec mode is in progress.
• You cannot change the “Number of Frames”
setting while recording in Frame Rec mode is in
progress. To change it, pause the recording.
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode
(page 69) during Frame Recording.
C
MF
C
A
M
A
E
R
A
SET
ssis t
olor ar Type
F l i cker Reduce
:
:
Of f
Mul t i
B
B
B
B
B
B
Z
oo
I n ter val Rec
Fra e Rec
S&Q Mot i on
m
Speed
00:00
m
Set ting
ber of Fra
:
Of f
1
N
u
m
m
es :
2
Set “Setting” to “On.”
Frame Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78
• Some extra frames may be recorded if you stop
recording or switch the card slot while
recording is paused in Frame Rec mode.
Slow & Quick Motion
Recording
Stopping Frame Recording
Set “Setting” of “Frame Rec” of the
CAMERA SET menu to “Off.”
When an HQ Progressive (P) video format is
recording different from that for playback.
By recording at the different frame rate, you can
obtain smoother slow-motion or quick-motion
effect when compared with slow-speed or fast-
speed playback of a material recorded at the
normal recording speed.
Recording stops and Frame Rec mode is
canceled.
Note
It automatically returns to “Off” when you set the
power switch to OFF, while the “Number of
Frames” setting is maintained.
Example
When the video format is HQ 720/24P, recording
with a frame rate between 1 and 23 fps provides a
quick-motion effect in playback, and recording
with the frame rate between 25 and 60 fps
provides a slow-motion effect in playback.
Notes
• Slow & Quick Motion cannot be activated
simultaneously with Frame Recording or
Interval Recording. When you activate Slow &
Quick Motion, Frame Recording and Interval
Recording are forcibly set to “Off.”
• No audio recording is made if the recording
frame rate is set to a value different from the
playback frame rate.
• Slow & Quick Motion recording cannot be
made if “Video Format” of the OTHERS menu
is set to HQ 1080/60i, HQ 1080/50i, SP 1080/
60i, SP 1080/50i, or SP 1080/24P.
camcorder to one of the following conditions.
Slow & Quick Motion recording cannot be done
properly with other conditions.
—NTSC Area
Video format
HQ 1080/30P
HQ 1080/24P
HQ 720/60P
HQ 720/30P
HQ 720/24P
Recording frame rate
1 to 30 fps
1 to 24 fps
1 to 60 fps
1 to 30 fps
1 to 24 fps
—PAL Area
Video format
HQ 1080/25P
HQ 720/50P
HQ 720/25P
Recording frame rate
1 to 25 fps
1 to 50 fps
1 to 25 fps
Slow & Quick Motion Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
79
Setting the recording frame rate with the
Direct menu
Preparatory Settings
Before starting Slow & Quick Motion recording,
make the necessary settings in advance.
When the special recording mode indication on
the screen is active, you can change the recording
frame rate with the Direct menu by operating the
joystick or the jog dial.
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
R
L
E
ANC
C
OR
D
NIT OL
V
ET
L/S
SE
F
FW
MO
E
S
U
A
T
L
AIL
/P
NEX
Y
A
MN
L
P
/
HU
T
EV
R
OP
T
S
P
O
T
/S
F
C
E
EV
R
R
T
R
P
A
T
S
D
L
O
H
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
Recording in Slow & Quick Motion
Mode
B
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
40
m
UT
I
D
O
IR
IS
S
9
.
5
2
1
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
2
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
O
IN
EX
K
C
SI
S
2
G
N
6
.
T
NLO
1
E
G
5
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
IO
LE
2
A
UD
C
T
IN
A
I
N
FOCU
C
1
S
E
X
T
IO
V
S
E
D
U
TO
A
U
A
L
E
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
E
T
O
2
-
+
H-
MA
NU
SH
C
M
RE
AU
AF
FU
PU
TO
LL
A
UT
F
RA
O
M
E
T
OU
C
T
GA
O
IN
FF
W
HIT
E
BA
L
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
Press the REC START/STOP button.
-
FULL AUTO
FRAME
S&Q Motion dial
Slow & Quick Motion recording begins.
+
GAIN
WHITE BAL BARS/CAM
Notes
L
ATW
B
M
H
A
PAST
• You cannot change the frame rate setting while
Slow & Quick Motion recording is in progress.
To change it, pause the recording.
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode
during Slow & Quick Motion recording (page
69).
1
Press the S&Q Motion dial for more
than 1 second.
The camcorder enters the Slow & Quick
Motion standby status.
The special recording mode indication on the
screen shows “S&Q Motion” and [Recording
frame rate]/[Playback frame rate] fps
beneath.
Stopping recording
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Slow & Quick Motion recording stops.
Note
T
S&Q
STBY
TCG 00:00:00:00
1080/24P
When recording at a low-speed frame rate, it may
take time until recording stops after you press the
REC START/STOP button.
HQ
S&Q Motion
29/24fps
Canceling Slow & Quick Motion mode
2
Set the frame rate for recording by
turning the S&Q Motion dial.
Push the S&Q Motion dial.
The setting range varies depending on the
current video format.
With a 1080 format: 1 to 30 fps
With a 720 format: 1 to 60 fps
Note
It automatically returns to “Off” when you set the
power switch to OFF, while the frame rate setting
is maintained.
When the RM-B750/B150 Remote Control
Unit is connected, “S&Q Motion” of the
CAMERA SET menu is activated, enabling the
operation from the Remote Control Unit.
For details, see “Operating the Slow & Quick
Slow & Quick Motion Recording
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The Freeze Mix function cannot be used if the
recording video format is SP 1080/24P.
• The Freeze Mix display cannot be obtained in
Quick & Slow Motion mode or Slow Shutter
mode.
• You cannot operate the Setup menus and
PICTURE PROFILE menu in Freeze Mix
status.
Freeze Mix: Image
Alignment
Using the Freeze Mix function, an image (still
picture) of a recorded clip can be temporarily
superimposed on the current camera picture,
permitting you to easily align images for next
recording.
To use the Freeze Mix function
Assign the Freeze Mix function to one of the
assignable buttons.
For details, see “Changing Functions of the
Superimposing a Freeze Mix image
1
2
Stop recording to set the camcorder to
STBY (recording standby) status.
Press the REC REVIEW button to
review the recorded images, or press the
ASSIGN button to which you assigned
“Freeze Mix.”
3
Press the ASSIGN button to which you
assigned “Freeze Mix” at the image
with which you want align.
The image where you pressed the ASSIGN button
in step 3 is displayed as a still picture over the
current camera picture.
Canceling Freeze Mix status
You can cancel it with the ASSIGN button to
which you assigned “Freeze Mix” or the REC
START/STOP button.
• When you cancel Freeze Mix status by pressing
the ASSIGN button, the normal camera picture
is restored.
• When you cancel Freeze Mix status by pressing
the REC START/STOP button, normal
recording begins.
Notes
• If the recorded picture and the current camera
picture differ in video format, the Freeze Mix
display cannot be achieved.
Freeze Mix: Image Alignment
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shot-transition operation buttons and
indications
Shot Transition
For shot-transition operations, use the three
TRANSITION operation buttons on the upper
panel.
The Shot Transition function helps you to easily
obtain complex picture effects by registering
camera settings or conditions as a “shot” to be
reproduced in a recording sequence.
A button
B button
Your settings for focus, zoom, iris, gain, shutter
speed, white balance, color matrix, and detail
level can be registered in combination in one shot,
and you can change the current camera settings to
those of the shot, or the settings reproduced from
one shot to those of another Shot, resulting in a
smooth transition of scenes.
A
B
SHOT
TC/U-BIT/DURATION
TRANSITION
MODEbuttonand
indicator
For example, you can shift the focus from a closer
object to a farther object, or change the depth of
field by adjusting the iris. In addition, you can
develop scenes under different recording
conditions smoothly. If you register the manual
adjustment function for white balance, the scenes
will develop smoothly between objects indoors
and those outdoors.
1
6
:9
WI
D
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
AF
A
Fu
ll
S
T
E
T
R
S
H
MF
.2
81
AD
ANS OT
ITI
Y
B
S
H
ON
OT
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
m
40
T
U
O
I
D
IR
IS
S
9
.
5
1
2
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
BR
T
DI
0
3
2
SP
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
CK
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
S
O
IN
SI
2
G
N
6
.
T
NLO
X
1
E
E
G
5
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
AU
C
8
.
8
AC
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
IN
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
2
A
U
D
C
T
A
S
I
N
C
1
T
E
IO
E
EX
D
U
TO
U
A
L
A
U
AL
N
V
C
LE
1
MA
E
T
O
2
H-
-
+
MA
C
EM
R
NU
PU
AU
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
AF
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
TC
GA
O
IN
FF
W
HI
TE
BA
L
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
P
W
M
RS
T
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
Notes
• Use the exclusive lens for Shot Transition. This
function may not operate correctly with a non-
exclusive lens.
• Shot transition cannot be activated in
combination with any of the EX Slow Shutter,
Interval Recording, Frame Recording, and Slow
& Quick Motion functions.
A button and B button
You can register a Shot to each of the buttons.
MODE button and indicator
When you press this button, the camcorder enters
Shot Transition operation mode, and the indicator
of the button lights.
The shot transition operation area is displayed on
the screen.
• If you wish to shift the focus in a shot transition,
page 64). The focus will not be shifted if Full
MF mode is selected.
• If you wish to shift the zoom in a shot transition,
The zoom will not be shifted with the MANU
setting.
Each time you press the button, the shot-transition
operation mode cycles among Store, Check,
Execute, and Off (normal Camera mode).
In Execute mode, the shot transition information
area appears.
• If you register a focus position in a macro area
with the MACRO switch ON, the focus may not
be shifted to the registered position if a shot
transition is executed with the MACRO switch
set to OFF.
Shot Transition
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shot-transition operation area
CA
ME
RA
SET
A
uto BLK alance
B
Trans Time
Trans Speed
Time/Speed
Trans Curve
St art Timer
Rec Link
:
:
:
:
:
:
2sec
5
Speed
Soft Stop
Of f
TCG 00:00:00:00
B
B
B
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
00:00
S
lo
w
Shutter
Shot Transition
Execute
A
:
Of f
Of f
Shot-
Shot-
A
B
2
Specify the conditions for a shot
transition.
S
E
12s
ff
Trans Time
0s
Rec Link:
O
After you set “Time/Speed” to “Time,” set
the duration of a transition in the range of 2
to 15 sec in steps of 1 second.
Shot-transition information area
Trans Speed
Note
After you set “Time/Speed” to “Speed,” set
the zoom transition speed (specifying the
time to be taken for the zoom moving from
the TELE end to the WIDE end at a certain
speed).
Camera operations are disabled when the shot
transition operation mode is Check or Execute.
When adjustments are required, set the mode to
Store.
The setting range is from 1 to 10. The larger
the number you set, the higher speed.
Preparatory Settings
Time/Speed
Set whether to specify the duration of a
transition by time or by speed of zoom
transition.
Before you start recording using the Shot
Transition function, make the necessary settings
with the CAMERA SET menu in advance.
The conditions you set are indicated in the shot
transition information area on the screen when
you set the shot-transition operation mode to
“Execute.”
Setting Contents
Time
The “Transition Time” setting is valid.
The “Transition Speed” setting is
valid.
Speed
Shot-transition information area
Trans Curve
Select the transition pattern.
The corresponding icon is displayed in the
shot transition information area.
Progress bar
S
E
12s
ff
Transition pattern
Transition time
Setting
and icon
Linear
Contents
0s
Rec Link:
O
To make the transition linearly.
Rec Link status
Start timer indication
P
Setting procedure
T
1
Select “Shot Transition” from the
CAMERA SET menu.
Shot Transition
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
When adjustment is finished, press the
Shot A or Shot B button.
Setting
and icon
Soft Trans
Contents
To make the transition slowly at
the beginning and end but linearly
in between.
The camera settings are registered to the pressed
button.
The registered camera settings are maintained
until you register them next.
P
Checking the registered settings (Shot)
T
Soft Stop
To make the transition slowly near
the end.
1
Press the MODE button to display
“Check” in the shot-transition
operation area.
P
2
Press the A or B button, whichever you
assigned to the shot you wish to check.
T
The selected shot (camera settings or conditions)
takes effect on the picture on the screen.
With this operation, you cannot check the
conditions of the transition.
P: Parameter level T: Transition of time
Start Timer
Set the time from start of recording to start of
the shot transition.
The countdown indication is displayed in the
shot-transition information area until the shot
transition is started by the Start Timer.
Recording with a Shot Transition
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
Rec Link
Set whether to link shot-transition start and
target shot selection to recording start.
The setting status is displayed in the shot
transition information area.
Off: Not to link to recording start
(To use the A or B button to start the
transition and specify the target shot)
Shot-A: To start the transition to Shot A in
synchronization with recording start
Shot-B: To start the transition to Shot B in
synchronization with recording start
Operations differ depending the “Rec Link”
setting.
Making a transition from the current
picture to a registered shot
1
Adjust the camera settings to obtain an
image with which you wish to start
recording.
2
Press the MODE button to display
“Execute” in the shot-transition
operation area.
3
Exit the menu to finish the settings.
Registering a shot
3
4
Press the REC START/STOP button.
You can register two kinds of shots: A and B.
Recording begins.
1
Press the MODE button to display
“Store” in the shot-transition operation
area.
When “Rec Link” is “Off,” press the
button of the target shot (A or B) when
you wish to start the shot transition.
The current camera settings are gradually
shifted to those registered to the specified
shot.
2
Adjust the camera settings to obtain an
image you wish to register.
Shot Transition
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84
When “Rec Link” is “Shot-A” or “Shot-
B,” the camcorder automatically performs
the shot transition to the camera settings
registered to Shot A or Shot B, respectively.
You need not press the button.
Making a transition from Shot B to Shot A
When “Rec Link” is set to “Off” or “Shot-A,” a
shot transition from Shot B to Shot A is possible.
1
2
3
4
5
Press the MODE button to display
“Check” in the shot-transition
operation area.
Notes
• You cannot return to the status in step 1 once
after you start the shot transition. If the status
must be resumed, register it as a shot.
Press the B button.
• When you perform recording on an external
device connected via the i.LINK(HDV)
connector in synchronization with REC
START/STOP operations on this camcorder,
recording start on the external device and shot-
transition start may not be synchronized even if
“Rec Link” has been set to “Shot-A” or “Shot-
B,” depending on the performance of the
external device.
The picture is adjusted according to the
camera settings registered for Shot B.
Press the MODE button to display
“Execute” in the shot-transition
operation area.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Recording begins with the camera settings
registered for Shot B.
Making a transition from Shot A to Shot B
When “Rec Link” is “Off,” press the A
button when you wish to start the shot
transition.
When “Rec Link” is set to “Off” or “Shot-B,” a
shot transition from Shot A to Shot B is possible.
When “Rec Link” is “Shot-A,” the
camcorder automatically performs the shot
transition to the camera settings registered
for Shot A. It is not necessary to press the A
button.
1
2
3
4
5
Press the MODE button to display
“Check” in the shot-transition
operation area.
Press the A button.
The picture is adjusted according to the
camera settings registered for Shot A.
Ending recording
When recording is completed, press the REC
START/STOP button.
Press the MODE button to display
“Execute” in the shot-transition
operation area.
To cancel recording while a transition is in
progress
If you press the REC START/STOP button
during recording, the recording stops, even when
a shot transition is in progress.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Recording begins with the camera settings
registered for Shot A.
The E-E picture of the settings where the
recording stops is displayed.
When “Rec Link” is “Off,” press the B
button when you wish to start the shot
transition.
Releasing a Shot Transition
When “Rec Link” is “Shot-B,” the
camcorder automatically performs the shot
transition to the camera settings registered
for Shot B. It is not necessary to press the B
button.
Press the MODE button so that the button
indicator goes dark.
The viewfinder screen resumes the normal
condition.
Shot Transition
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fade In
Set this to “On” to start recording with fade
in.
(When you operate the function using an
assignable button, it is not necessary to set
“Fade In” to “On” with the menu.)
Fader Function
Using the Fader function, you can start a
recording by fading in a scene or end a recording
by fading out of a scene.
The fader function can be assigned to an
assignable button.
Fade In Type
Select the initial status of the fade-in.
White: To fade in from a white screen
Black: To fade in from a black screen
Fade In Time
Set the duration (1/2/3/5/10 sec.) of fade-in.
For function assignment, see “Changing Functions
Notes
3
Specify the fade-out conditions.
• The fader function cannot be used in
combination with the Slow & Quick Motion,
Interval Recording, Frame Recording, or EX
Slow Shutter function.
• When a clip is recorded using the fade-in
function, a white or black screen becomes the
Change the index frame for easier
Fade Out
Set this to “On” to end recording with fade
out.
(When you operate the function using an
assignable button, it is not necessary to set
“Fade Out” to “On” with the menu.)
Fade Out Type
Select the final status of the fade-out.
White: To fade out to a white screen
Black: To fade out to a black screen
identification.
• When you perform recording on an external
device connected via the i.LINK(HDV)
connector in synchronization with REC
START/STOP operations on this camcorder,
recording start/stop on the external device and
fade-in start/fade-out end may not be
synchronized, depending on the performance of
the external device.
Fade Out Time
Set the duration (1/2/3/5/10 sec.) of fade-out.
4
Exit the menu.
• If you set “Fade In” to “On” with the menu, the
camcorder enters Fade-in standby status when
you exit the menu.
• When the Fader indication on the screen is
active, the initial status (“White Fader” or
“Black Fader”) you set with “Fade In Type”
flashes.
Preparatory Settings
Specify the conditions to activate the Fader
function in advance with the following
procedure:
74%
1
Select “Fader” of the CAMERA SET
menu.
White Fader
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
C
A
M
E
R
A
SET
Speed
I n ter v al Rec
Fra e Rec
S&Q ot i on
ND
1
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000CH1
CH2
++
B
B
B
B
Z
oom
Fade I n
Fade I n Type
Fade I n Ti
:
:
:
:
Of f
m
Black
2sec
Of f
M
me
When using an assignable button
00:00
Rec Review
Fader
TLCS
:
B
2sec Fade
Fade
O
O
O
ut
ut Type : Black
ut Ti e: 2sec
If you assigned the Fader function to an
assignable button, the Fade In/Fade Out On/Off
settings can be made using the button.
B
Fade
m
2
Specify the fade-in conditions.
Fader Function
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86
For fading in a scene
Note
Press the ASSIGN button to which you assigned
the Fader function in STBY (recording standby)
status.
The Fade In/Fade Out settings automatically
return to “Off” when you turn off the camcorder,
while the Type and Time settings set with the
menu are maintained.
The fade-in function is turned on.
For fading out
Press the ASSIGN button to which you assigned
the Fader function during recording.
The camcorder enters in the fade-out standby
status.
Starting Recording with a Fade In
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Recording begins by fading in the camera picture.
When the fade-in process you specified is
completed, the camcorder enters Normal
Recording mode.
The Fade-In Type indication flashes during the
fade-in process and goes off when the process
ends.
Ending Recording with a Fade Out
• If you set “Fade Out” to “On” with the menu,
the camcorder automatically enters Fade-out
standby status when it is set to Recording mode.
• When you press the ASSIGN button to which
you assigned the Fader function after starting
recording, the camcorder enters fade-out
standby status.
Press the REC START/STOP button to
start fading out of the camera picture.
The fading-out process begins.
When the fading-out process you specified is
completed, recording simultaneously stops.
The Fade-Out Type indication flashes during the
fade-out process and goes off when the process
ends.
Canceling the Fader function
Set “Fade In” and “Fade Out” to “Off” with the
menu.
Or press the ASSIGN button again.
Fader Function
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Set the power switch to CAMERA to
turn the camcorder on in Camera
mode.
Picture Profiles
2
3
Press the PICTURE PROFILE button.
The PICTURE PROFILE menu is displayed.
You can customize the picture quality, depending
on the conditions or circumstances of recording,
and store them as a picture profile, enabling the
picture quality to be resumed just by your
selecting the picture profile.
Operating the jog dial or the joystick,
select “SEL” from the PICTURE
PROFILE menu then select the picture
profile number (PP1 to PP6) to operate.
Six different picture profiles (PP1 to PP6) can be
stored in memory.
P
I
CTURE PROFILE
The same standard (reference) values are
registered to six picture profiles at the factory as
those specified for the Picture Profile Off status.
The PICTURE PROFILE menu is available for
picture-profile operations.
OFF
SEL
SET
PP1: STANDARD
PP2: STANDARD
PP3: STANDARD
PP4: STANDARD
PP5: STANDARD
PP6: STANDARD
Note
The picture profiles can be operated only in
Camera mode. They cannot be operated in Media
mode.
4
Operating the jog dial or the joystick,
select “SET” and make the settings of
the picture profile items.
When the RM-B750/B150 Remote Control Unit
is connected, PP6 is automatically selected and
the picture profiles can be adjusted from the RM-
B750/B150.
P
I
CTURE PROF
I
LE
PP1: STANDARD
SEL
SET
B
B
B
B
B
Pro f i le Na
atrix
Color Correction
hi te
Detail
me
M
For details, see “Operating From the RM-B750/
W
For details on the setting items, see “Picture
Registering the Customized
Settings as a Picture Profile
5
When the settings are completed, press
the PICTURE PROFILE button to exit
the menu.
R
EL
CANC
OR
IT
ON VO
D
L
F
F
W
M
EL/SET
E
S
U
A
/P
Y
A
L
P
S
L
AIL
NEXT
MN
/
THU
EV
OP
ST
P
O
T
F
R
C
E
/S
R
T
R
A
PREV
T
S
D
L
O
H
Selecting a Picture Profile
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
B
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
40
m
T
U
O
I
D
IR
IS
S
9
.
5
2
1
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
2
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
O
IN
EX
K
SI
S
C
LO
EN
2
G
N
6
.
T
10
5
G
TO
U
A
AL
T
Selecting a Picture Profile using the
PICTURE PROFILE menu
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
2
A
U
D
C
T
A
I
N
C
1
T
E
IO
V
S
EX
D
U
TO
A
U
A
L
E
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
E
T
O
2
-
+
H-
MA
C
EM
R
NU
PU
AU
AF
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
GA
TC
O
IN
FF
W
HI
TE
BA
L
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
Once you store a picture profile, you can call the
picture quality registered in the picture profile as
follows:
PICTURE
PROFILE
CAMERA OFF MEDIA
1
Set the power switch to CAMERA to
turn the camcorder on in Camera
mode.
Power switch:
CAMERA
PICTURE
PROFILE
button
2
Press the PICTURE PROFILE button.
Picture Profiles
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88
The PICTURE PROFILE menu is displayed.
2
Select “Copy” from “SET” of the
PICTURE PROFILE menu.
3
Operating the jog dial or the joystick,
select “SEL” then the desired picture
profile from the list.
The picture profile numbers are listed on the
screen.
3
4
Specify the target picture profile.
Example:
“Execute” and “Cancel” are displayed.
P
I
CTURE PROFILE
OFF
SEL
SET
Select “Execute.”
PP1: SceneA
PP2: SceneB
PP3: SceneC
PP4: SceneD
PP5: SceneE
PP6: SceneF
Copying begins.
When copying ends, the completion message is
displayed for three seconds, and the original
screen display is restored.
The camcorder is adjusted to the picture
quality specified by the selected Profile.
(If you select “OFF,” the camcorder will be
fixed at the standard picture quality, and no
picture adjustment is allowed.)
Resetting a Picture Profile
You can reset a selected picture profile to the
factory settings (standard status).
1
Select the picture profile you wish to
reset by proceeding from step 1 to 3 of
4
Press the PICTURE PROFILE button
to exit the menu.
Selecting a Picture Profile using the
Direct menu
2
3
Select “Reset” from “SET” of the
PICTURE PROFILE menu.
The picture profile being selected is displayed
when you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button.
“Execute” and “Cancel” are displayed.
Select “Execute.”
TLCS
.
Resetting begins.
7
*
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
M
F
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
When resetting ends, the completion message is
displayed for three seconds, and the original
screen display is restored.
ATW 4300K PP
1
ND1
You can select picture profiles with the Direct
menu by operating the joystick or the jog dial.
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
Copying the Settings of a Picture
Profile
You can copy the settings of a selected picture
profile to another picture profile.
1
Select the source picture profile by
proceeding from step 1 to 3 of
Picture Profiles
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Picture Profile Items
The values when “Off” is selected at “SEL” of the PICTURE PROFILE menu are shown in bold face
(example: Standard).
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Profile name
Set the profile name in 8 characters at maximum.
Profile Name
Changing the picture profile
name
You can use upper- and lowercase alphabetics,
numerics 0 to 9, - (hyphen), _ (underscore) and
space.
Setting
On / Off
Set to “On” to activate the color phase adjustment
function with matrix operations for the entire
picture.
Matrix
Adjusting the color phase
over the entire area with
matrix operations
Note
When this function is set to “Off,” Color Correction
is also set to “Off” in synchronization.
Select
Select the built-in preset matrix provided for
convenience.
Standard /High SAT / FL
Light / Cinema
Level
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the color saturation for the entire picture
area.
Phase
Adjust the hue for the entire picture area.
–99 to +99 (±0)
R-G, R-B, G-R, G-B, B-R, B-G
–99 to +99 (±0)
Finely adjust the color phase for the entire picture
area by independently setting each of the factors.
Setting
On / Off
Set to “On” to enable the color phase adjustment
for a specific area. (Simultaneous adjustment of
multiple areas is not allowed. You can adjust it for
one area only.)
Color Correction
Adjusting the color phase in
a specific area
1)
Execute to detect the color in the center of the
screen. The area centering around the detected
color of the range specified by “Target Width”
becomes the target area of Color Correction.
Area Detection
Execute/Cancel
2)
Set to “On” to display the Zebra 1 pattern for the
target area of Color Correction.
Area Indication
On / Off
Target Phase
0 to 359 (130)
Manually adjust the center color for the target area
for Color Correction.
Note
When Area Detection is executed, this setting is
overwritten by the Area Detection result. Perform
fine adjustment with this item as required.
Target Width
0 to 90 (40)
Set the width of color phase for the target area for
Color Correction.
Level
Set the saturation for the color in the target area.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Phase
Adjust the hue for the color in the target area.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Picture Profiles
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Offset White
Set to “On” to shift the conversion value for auto
White
On / Off
white balance in Memory A or B mode and that for
auto tracing white in ATW mode to a lower color
temperature or a higher color temperature.
Setting the white balance
offset and the color
temperature of the preset
white
Offset<A>
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the volume of the offset white (shifting
volumes) of the conversion value in Memory A,
Memory B, or ATW mode, respectively.
Offset<B>
–99 to +99 (±0)
Offset<ATW>
–99 to +99 (±0)
Preset White
2100 to 10000 (3200)
Adjust the preset color temperature when Preset
white balance mode is selected in steps of 100K.
Notes
• Except when the white balance is in Memory A
or B mode or when ATW is active, you cannot
confirm the result of changing the Offset White
and Offset settings on the screen.
• Except when Preset white balance mode is
selected, you cannot confirm the result of
changing the Preset White settings on the screen.
Setting
Set to “On” to apply the details to the video signal.
Detail
On / Off
Adjusting the details to be
applied to the picture
Level
Adjust the detail level.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Frequency
Set the center frequency of the details.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Setting the center frequency higher decreases the
details, and setting it lower increases the details.
Crispening
Adjust the noise-suppression level.
–99 to +99 (±0)
When you set it to a higher level, less noise may be
seen, as fine elements of details are deleted leaving
only high-level elements.
When you set it to a lower level, fine elements are
applied while increasing noise.
H/V Ratio
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the horizontal-to-vertical ratio of detail
elements.
A higher value makes the vertical elements
increased with respect to the horizontal elements.
White Limiter
Limit the white details.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Black Limiter
Limit the black details.
–99 to +99 (±0)
V DTL Creation
NAM / Y / G / G+R
Select the source signal to generate vertical details
from among NAM (G or R whichever is higher), Y,
G, and G+R.
Knee APT Level
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the knee aperture level (level of details to be
applied to the sections above the knee point).
Picture Profiles
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Setting Set to “On” to enable the detail level adjustment for
On / Off
Skin Tone Detail
Adjusting the details to be
applied to the areas of a
specific color phase
specific color-phase areas.
The detail level is uniform over the entire picture
with the Off setting.
Level
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the skin-tone detail level.
1)
Execute to detect the color in the center of the
screen. The area centering around the detected
color becomes the target area for Skin Tone Detail
control.
Area Detection
Execute/Cancel
2)
Set to “On” to display the Zebra 1 pattern for the
target area for Skin Tone Detail control.
Area Indication
On / Off
Saturation
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the color (saturation) level for Skin Tone
Detail control.
Note
When Area Detection is executed, this setting is
automatically returned to 0.
Phase
0 to 359 (130)
Adjust the center color-phase value for the target
area for Skin Tone Detail control.
Note
When Area Detection is executed, this setting is
automatically changed to the value equivalent to
that of the detected color.
Width
0 to 90 (40)
Adjust the width of the color phase of the target
area for Skin Tone Detail control.
Note
When Area Detection is executed, the Width
setting automatically returns to 40.
Setting
On / Off
Set to “On” to compress the high-luminance area of
the picture.
Knee
Adjusting the knee level
Note
Knee is fixed and cannot be changed in the
following cases:
• When Gamma is set to CINE1 to 4
• When the electronic shutter is in SLS mode
• When EX Slow Shutter is active
Auto Knee
On / Off
Set to “On” to automatically set the best knee
conditions according to the luminance level of the
picture.
With “Off” the knee conditions can be manually
adjusted independently of the luminance level of
the picture.
Point
Set the knee point when Auto Knee is “Off.”
50 to 109 (90)
Slope
–99 to +99 (±0)
Set the knee slope (volume of compression) when
Auto Knee is “Off.”
Knee SAT Level
0 to 99 (50)
Adjust the knee saturation level for the area over
the knee point.
Picture Profiles
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Level Adjust the gamma compensation level.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Gamma
Adjusting the gamma
compensation level and
selecting the gamma curve
3)
Select the type of reference curve for gamma
compensation.
Select
STD1 / STD2 / STD3 / STD4 /
CINE1 / CINE2 / CINE3 /
CINE4
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the master black level.
Black
Adjusting the black
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the level of black gamma function that
emphasizes only the dark areas of the picture to
clear the tones or on the contrary de-emphasizes it
to reduce noise.
Black Gamma
Adjusting the black gamma
level
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the level of the low key saturation to
heighten the colors only in the dark areas of the
picture or pale them to reduce noise.
Low Key SAT
Adjusting the low key
saturation
Execute / Cancel
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to copy.
Copy
Copying a picture profile
Select “Execute” to reset.
Reset
Resetting a picture profile
1)To execute “Area Detection”
3)Available gamma curves
STD1: This deemphasizes the contrast in dark areas
more than STD2 and emphasizes the contrast in
intermediate areas.
1. Select “Area Detection.”
A square marker that indicates the detection
area appears in the center of the screen, and
“Execute” and “Cancel” are displayed below.
STD2: This deemphasizes the contrast in dark areas
more than STD3.
STD3: Standard (factory setting)
2. Select “Execute.”
STD4: This emphasizes the contrast in dark areas more
than STD3.
Color-phase detection in the marker area is
performed.
CINE1:This smoothes the contrast in darker areas and
accentuates gradation changes in brighter areas,
for a calm and quiet effect.
When detection successfully ends, a
completion message is displayed. Then the
screen is restored, on which the target area
for the Color Correction or Skin Tone Detail
adjustment is changed to the area centering
around the color detected by “Area
Detection,” and the Area Indication (zebra
pattern) appears.
CINE2:This gives almost the same results as CINE1.
Select this when you wish to obtain 100% video
signals for editing or other purposes.
CINE3:This emphasizes the contrast between light and
dark more than CINE1 and CINE2, and also
accentuates gradation changes on the black side.
CINE4:This emphasizes the contrast in dark areas more
than CINE3. Contrast in dark areas is weaker
and contrast in bright areas is stronger than STD
curves.
If detection fails, an error message appears,
then the precious screen is restored.
2)The Area Indication setting is common to all picture
profiles PP1 to PP6.
Picture Profiles
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Select “Execute” again.
The last recorded clip is deleted from the
memory card.
Deleting Clips
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
In Camera mode, the Last Clip DEL function for
deleting the last recorded clip and the All Clips
DEL function for deleting all clips from a
memory card are available.
Deleting All Clips
Using the Setup menu, you can delete all recorded
clips from the memory card in the selected card
slot.
In Media mode, you can specify the clip to be
deleted.
1
2
3
Select “All Clips DEL” from “Clip” of
the OTHERS menu.
For clip deletion in Media mode, see “Deleting a
Select “Execute.”
Deleting the Last Recorded Clip
The confirmation message is displayed.
Using the assignable button to which you
assigned the Last Clip DEL function or the Setup
menu, the last recorded clip is easily deleted.
Select “Execute” again.
All the clips are deleted from the memory
card.
Note
To delete using the assignable button
Clips with the OK mark applied cannot be
deleted.
Assign the Last Clip DEL function to one of the
For details on the OK mark, see “Adding the OK
1
2
Press the assignable button to which
you have assigned “Last Clip DEL.”
The confirmation message is displayed.
Operating the joystick or the jog dial,
select “Execute.”
The last recorded clip is deleted from the
memory card.
To delete using the Setup menu
1
Select “Last Clip DEL” from “Clip” of
the OTHERS menu.
O
THERS
Di rect
i. LINK I/
Tr i gger
ountry
Video For
l i p
For
M
enu
O
ode
:
:
:
:
:
B
B
Part
D
isable
M
Both
NTSC
Ti t l e Pref i x
Nu ber et
:
:
B
234_
0001
C
m
S
00:00
m
at
HQ 1080/60i Update
C
Last
A l l
C
l i p DEL Execute
mat
M
edia
C
l i ps DEL Cancel
2
Select “Execute.”
The confirmation message is displayed.
Deleting Clips
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94
Notes
• If a setup file already exists on the memory card
you specified in step 1, a message to confirm
whether to overwrite the file is displayed.
• If there is not sufficient space on the memory
card, an error message is displayed.
Storing/Retrieving the
Setting Data
You can store all the menu settings (including
picture profiles) as a setup file on an SxS memory
card.
By retrieving the stored setup file, the proper
setup condition can be immediately obtained.
For the setup file operations, use “Camera Data”
of the OTHERS menu.
Retrieving the Setup File
When you retrieve the stored setup file, the
camcorder settings are changed according to the
file.
Note
1
Insert the memory card on which you
stored the setup file into a card slot.
The Clock Set, Time Zone, Hours Meter (page
128) values are excluded.
Check that the corresponding memory card
icon is displayed on the screen. If a memory
card in the other slot is selected, press the
SLOT SELECT button to switch.
Storing the Setup File
Only one setup file can be stored on one SxS
memory card.
2
3
4
Select “Camera Data” from the
OTHERS menu.
1
Insert a memory card on which you
wish to store the setup file to a card slot.
Select “Recall.”
“Cancel” and “Execute” appear to the right.
Check that the corresponding memory card
icon is displayed on the screen. If a memory
card in the other slot is selected, press the
SLOT SELECT button to switch.
Select “Execute.”
Reading of data from the memory card
begins.
2
Select “Camera Data” from the
OTHERS menu.
An in-progress message is displayed during data
reading. When the read-out is completed, a
completion message is displayed, indicating that
the camcorder settings have been changed
according to the setup file.
O
THERS
B
B
Al l Reset
Ca era Data
m
Store
Time Zone
Clock Set
Language
:
B
UTC +09:00 Recall
00:00
Resetting to the Standard Values
:
B
Engl i sh
Assign Button
The current camcorder settings you made through
various menu and button operations can be
collectively returned to the standard statuses
(factory settings) by executing “All Reset” of the
OTHERS menu.
3
4
Select “Store.”
“Cancel” and “Execute” appear to the right.
Select “Execute.”
Writing of data to the memory card begins.
An in-progress message is displayed during
writing. When writing is completed, a completion
message is displayed.
Storing/Retrieving the Setting Data
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Playing Back Clips
Turning the camcorder on with the power switch
set to MEDIA sets it to Media mode, and the clips
recorded on the SxS memory card are displayed
as thumbnails on the screen. (If no clips are
recorded on the card, a no-clip message is
displayed.)
You can start playback from the clip selected on
the thumbnail screen.
The playback picture can be seen in the
viewfinder and external monitors.
For connection of external monitors, see
Thumbnail Screen
Clip index frame
The index frame images of the clips on the SxS
memory card are displayed as thumbnails.
The recording date and starting time are displayed
below the index image of each clip. (The OK
mark symbol is displayed if the clip is marked.)
The first frame is automatically specified as the
index frame of a clip when recorded. You can
change it to another one as required (see page
107).
The icon of the current memory card is highlighted, shading the nonselected one.
(If the card is write-protected, a lock icon is displayed to the left.)
Current clip No./ Total number of clips
120
m
in
0011 / 0300
Cursor
(yellow)
OK
OK
01
01
01
/
/
/
JAN 10:53
JAN 14:53
JAN 18:53
01
01
01
/
/
/
JAN 11:53
JAN 15:53
JAN 19:53
01
01
01
/
/
/
JAN 12 : 53
JAN 16 : 53
JAN 20 : 53
01
01
01
/
/
/
JAN 13 : 53
OK
OK
OK
JAN 17 : 53
8
OK
JAN 21 : 53
01/ JAN / 2007 10 :53 S
&
Q
Mot ion 29 / 24fps TCR 00:00:00:00
1
7
( )
JPAN0011 1
HQ 1080 / 24p
DUR 00:03:19:23
2
3 4
5
6
Data for the clip at the cursor are displayed in 1 to 8.
1. Date and starting time of recording
2. Clip name
3. OK mark
Displayed only if the selected clip is marked OK
an AV independent file, such as those added to
the memory card using a computer. Not all
operations and indications may be available for
such clips.
5. Recording video format
6. Duration of the clip
7. Timecode
The timecode of the index frame is displayed.
4. AV independent file icon
Displayed if the selected clip is an AV
independent file. This indicates that the clip is
Playing Back Clips
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Special recording information
If the selected clip was recorded in a special
recording mode (S&Q Motion, Interval Rec, or
Frame Rec), the mode is displayed.
For a clip recorded in S&Q Motion mode,
[recording frame rate/playback frame rate] fps is
displayed to the right.
Playback
For playback operations, use the playback control
buttons on the handle.
MONITOR
VOL
Joystick
THUMBNAIL SEL/SET CANCEL
Switching the SxS memory cards
PLAY/PAUSE
button
F
REV PLAY/PAUSE
/S
F
FWD
When two memory cards are loaded, press the
SLOT SELECT button to switch memory cards.
j
G
J
F FWD button
F REV button
PREV button
STOP button
PREV
STOP
NEXT
l
s
L
NEXT button
Note
In Media mode, card switching is enabled only
when the thumbnail screen is displayed or when
an external input picture is displayed by pressing
the STOP button.
You cannot switch memory cards during
playback.
R
EL
ANC
R
C
O
IT
ON VO
D
L
FW
F
M
EL/SET
E
S
U
S
L
A
EXT
N
AIL
N
/P
Y
A
L
/
P
HUM
T
EV
OP
T
R
S
P
O
T
F
C
RE /S
V
PRE
T
R
A
T
S
D
L
O
H
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
B
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TIO
ft
m
N
40
m
T
U
O
I
D
IR
IS
S
9
.
5
1
2
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
2
1
HI
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
CK
LO
EN
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
O
S
IN
EX
SI
2
G
N
6
.
T
10
5
G
3
TO
Continuous playback of cards in slot A and B is
not possible.
A
U
L
A
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
IN
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
2
A
UD
E
C
T
IN
A
S
T
I
N
C
1
T
IO
V
EX
D
U
TO
A
U
MA
A
L
E
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
E
T
O
2
H-
-
MA
C
EM
NU
PU
R
AU
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
AF
F
RA
O
M
E
+
U
T
O
C
T
G
AIN
O
FF
W
HI
TE
BA
L
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
Displaying only the clips marked OK on
the thumbnail screen
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• When the IR Remote Commander is enabled,
you can use its playback control buttons instead
MONITOR VOL
• Functions of the playback control buttons are
occasionally assigned to the joystick (see page
98).
THUMBNAIL SEL/SET CANCEL
• The jog dial is also valid when you move the
cursor on the thumbnail screen or proceed to the
next step of operations.
THUMBNAIL button
R
NCEL
R
CA
O
IT
D
N
L
O
O
V
F
F
W
M
L/SET
SE
E
S
U
A
T
L
IL
BNA
/
P
NEX
Y
LA
P
/
M
OP
ST
THU
P
O
T
F
REV
C
E
/S
R
T
REV
R
A
P
T
S
D
L
O
H
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
Playing back the selected and
subsequent clips in sequence
B
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
40
m
T
U
O
I
D
IR
IS
S
9
.
5
1
2
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
2
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
CK
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
S
O
IN
EX
SI
2
G
N
6
.
T
NLO
0
E
G
5
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
2
A
U
D
C
T
A
S
I
N
C
1
T
E
IO
V
EX
D
U
TO
A
U
A
L
E
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
E
T
O
2
-
+
H-
MA
C
EM
NU
PU
R
AU
AF
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
TC
GA
O
IN
FF
W
HIT
E
BA
L
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
1
Operating the joystick or the jog dial,
move the cursor to the thumbnail image
of the clip with which you wish to start
playback.
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
The thumbnail screen changes such that it
contains only the clips marked OK among the
clips on the current memory card. To return to the
thumbnail screen with all the clips, press the
THUMBNAIL button again.
2
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
selected clip.
The clips after the selected clips are played back
in sequence.
For operations of the OK mark, see “Adding the OK
When playback of the last clip ends, the
camcorder enters PAUSE (still picture) mode at
the last frame of the last clip.
Playing Back Clips
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display example (Playback mode):
Press the THUMBNAIL button to return to the
thumbnail screen.
Function when tilted up (toward the subject)
Notes
PRV
• The playback picture may be momentarily
distorted or frozen between clips. The playback
control buttons and THUMBNAIL button do
not function during this condition.
Function
Function
when tilted
when tilted
to the right
to the left
NXT
• When you select a clip on the thumbnail button
and start plaback, the playback picture at the
beginning of the clip may be distorted. To start
playback without distortion, once pause
playback after starting it, press the PREV button
to return to the top of the clip, then restart
playback.
Function when tilted down (toward the EVF)
Guide marks Functions
M
<
m
4-times playback in forward
direction
15-times playback in forward
direction
4-times playback in reverse
direction
Information displayed on the playback
screen
,
15-times playback in reverse
direction
The following information is superimposed on
the playback picture.
B
X
Normal playback
Pause
PRV
Jump to the top of the current
clip
1
2
3
4
5
NXT
Jump to the top of the next clip
120min
B PLAY
TCR 00:00:00:00
0011/03 00
7. Audio levels
The audio levels in recording are displayed.
Pausing the playback
PRV
NXT
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The playback is restarted by pressing the button
again.
CH1
CH2
6
7
Switching to high-speed playback
1. Battery remaining/DC IN voltage
2. Playback mode
3. SxS memory card in use
A
The camcorder permits you to play clips at 4
times or 15 times normal speed in the forward or
reverse direction. Audio is muffled in high-speed
playback.
mark appears if the memory card is write-
protected.
To play at a high speed in the forward direction
Press the F FWD button.
Each time you press the button, the playback
speed switches between 4 times and 15 times
normal speed.
4. Time data
The time data for the playback picture are
displayed. Each time you press the TC/U-BIT/
DURATION button, the indication is switched
between timecode (TCR) and user-bit (UB)
data.
To play at a high speed in the reverse direction
Press the F REV button.
Each time you press the button, the playback
speed switches between 4 times and 15 times
normal speed.
5. Clip no./total number of clips on the
memory card
6. Joystick operation guidance area
The functions assigned to the joystick in the
current condition are displayed.
To return to normal playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
Playing Back Clips
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cueing up
Headphone connector
To return to the top of the current clip
Press the PREV button.
• When you press the button in normal or fast-
forward playback, the top of the current clip is
cued up then playback begins.
MONITOR VOL
buttons
MONITOR VOL
• When you press the button in fast-reverse
playback or in Pause mode, the top of the
current clip is cued up, then the still picture is
displayed.
T
H
IG
R
B
T
S
A
R
T
N
O
C
A
R
G
B
E
IN
Z
K
A
E
P
FO
IN
A
T
T
A
Y
/B
PL
IS
D
E
AG
IM
R
O
R
N
IR
O
M
F
F
O
O
F
F
L
H
l
P
R
j
E
F
V
R
E
V
s
T
G
P
U
H
S
/
Y
A
L
N
A
M
L
A
P
/
I L
U
J
S
E
S
O
N
M
E
F
E
/ S
L
O
R
T
I
F
T
W
V
D
O
C
L
A
N
C
E
L
• Repeated pressing of the button cues up the
previous clips one by one.
R
N
O
I
T
A
R U
/ D I T
- B
U
/
C
T
CH
-1
N
O
O
B
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
R
S
T
AU
DIO IN
A
CH
-2
MI
LIN
C
E
S
M
IC
+4
8V
T
S
R
O
A
T
P
E
R
M
IC
T
L
INE
D
/
C
MI
I
C+
48
N
V
E
R
L
F
A
N
E
X
E
O
A
C
P
S
U
S
D
E
M
D
O
V E
C
R
N
W
E
I
E
O
I
T
U
O
R
T
S
To start playback from the top of the first clip
Press the PREV button and F REV button
simultaneously. The top of the first-recorded clip
on the memory card is cued up.
V
I
D
E
O
CH
-1
AU
C
H-2
DI
O
O
UT
CO
MP
ON
EN
OU
T
T
Built-in speaker
To jump to the top of the next clip
Press the NEXT button.
With the headphones connected to the headphone
jack, the built-in speaker is turned off.
Press the MONITOR VOL buttons to adjust the
sound volume.
The level bar is displayed during adjustment.
You can select audio channel(s) to be monitored
SET menu.
• When you press the button in normal or fast-
forward playback, the top of the next clip is
cued up then playback begins.
• When you press the button in fast-reverse
playback or in Pause mode, the top of the next
clip is cued up, then the still picture is displayed.
• Repeated pressing of the button cues up the
subsequent clips one by one.
To start playback from the top of the last clip
Press the F FWD button and NEXT button
simultaneously. The top of the last-recorded clip
on the memory card is cued up.
Adding shot marks during playback
In the same manner as in recording, you can add
shot marks to the clip during playback.
At the point where you wish to add a shot
mark, press the “Shot Mark1” or “Shot
Mark2” assigned button, or the
SHOTMARK 1 or 2 button on the IR
Remote Commander.
Monitoring audio
In Normal playback mode, you can monitor the
recorded audio signals through the built-in
speaker or connected headphones.
Notes
• No shot mark can be added if the memory card
is write-protected.
• No shot mark can be added to the first or last
frame of a clip.
Stopping playback
You can stop playback with either of the
following operations:
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
Playback mode is canceled, restoring the
thumbnail screen.
Playing Back Clips
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clip Operations
In Media mode, you can operate the clips or
confirm and change the subsidiary data for clips
using the Clip Operation menus.
The corresponding Clip Operation menu pops up
on the screens as shown below.
Clip Operation Menus
Thumbnail screen (page 102)
Still picture in Pause mode (page 102)
CANCEL
CANCEL
DISP CLIP INFO
OK MARK ADD
OK MARK DEL
COPY CLIP
DISP CLIP INFO
OK MARK ADD
SHOT MARK1 ADD
SHOT MARK2 ADD
EXPAND CLIP
DELETE CLIP
SHOT MARK
SHOT MARK1
SHOT MARK2
EXPAND CLIP
EXPAND CLIP screen (page 105)
SHOT MARK screen (page 106)
CANCEL
CANCEL
EXPAND (COARSE)
EXPAND (FINE)
PAUSE
PAUSE
SET INDEX PIC
SHOT MARK1 DEL
SHOT MARK2 DEL
DIVIDE CLIP
SET INDEX PIC
SHOT MARK1 ADD
SHOT MARK2 ADD
SHOT MARK1 DEL
SHOT MARK2 DEL
DIVIDE CLIP
Clip Operations
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Function
Basic Operations of the Clip
Operation Menus
SHOT MARK2 To display thumbnails only of the
frames with shot mark 2 recorded
EXPAND CLIP To display the EXPAND CLIP
Displaying a Clip Operation menu
Press the joystick or the jog dial.
The Clip Operation menu for the current display
pops up.
Clip Operation menu in Pause mode
Pressing the joystick or the jog dial with a still
picture displayed in Pause mode calls the Clip
Operation menu for the clip in Pause mode.
Selecting a Clip Operation menu item
Turn the jog dial or tilt the joystick to select a
menu item then press the jog dial or the joystick.
Pressing the CANCEL button restores the
previous condition.
Item
Function
DISP CLIP INFO To display the CLIP INFO screen
for the clip (page 103)
Selecting “CANCEL” from a Clip Operation
menu turns the Clip Operation menu off.
OK MARK ADD To add the OK mark to the clip
ADD
Notes
• When the SxS memory card is write-protected,
you cannot copy/delete/divide clips, change the
index frames, and add/delete the OK and shot
marks.
ADD
EXPAND CLIP To display the EXPAND CLIP
• There may be items that cannot be selected
depending on the status when the menu is
displayed.
Clip Operation menu on the thumbnail
screen
Pressing the joystick or the jog dial with the
Clip Operation menu for the clip at the cursor.
Item
Function
DISP CLIP
INFO
To display the CLIP INFO screen for
the clip (page 103)
OK MARK
ADD
To add the OK mark to the clip (page
OK MARK
DELETE
COPY CLIP
To delete the OK mark from the clip
To copy the clip to another SxS
memory card (page 104)
SHOT MARK To display thumbnails only of the
frames with shot mark 1 and/or shot
mark 2 recorded (page 105)
SHOT MARK1 To display thumbnails only of the
frames with shot mark 1 recorded
Clip Operations
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying the Detailed Information of a Clip
When you select “DISP CLIP INFO” from a Clip Operation menu, the CLIP INFO screen appears.
120
m
in
CLIP I NFO
0011/0300
4
( )
JPAN0011 1 OK
01 / JAN/2007 10:53
HQ 1080 /24p
5
6
1
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
S&Q
Motion 29/24fps
TCR 00:05:00:02
TCR 00:05:00:00 STR
TCR 00:08:19:23 END
DUR 00:03:20:00
CH1/CH2
2
3
PREV CLIP
NEXT CLIP
1. Image of the current clip
7. Recording format
2. Image of the previous clip
8. Special recording information
If the selected clip was recorded in a special
recording mode (S&Q Motion, Interval Rec, or
Frame Rec), the mode is displayed.
For a clip recorded in S&Q Motion mode,
[recording frame rate/playback frame rate] fps is
displayed to the right.
Press the PREV button to switch to the CLIP
INFO screen of the previous clip.
3. Image of the next clip
Press the NEXT button to switch to the CLIP
INFO screen of the next clip.
4. Clip name
5. OK mark
Displayed only when the selected clip is
marked OK.
9. Timecode of the displayed frame
10. Timecode at the recording starting point
11. Timecode at the recording ending point
12. Duration of the clip
6. Date and starting time of recording
13. Recorded audio channels
Adding the OK Mark to a Clip
By adding the OK mark to clips, you can obtain a
thumbnail screen of only the marked clips when
you press the THUMBNAIL button.
Clips with the OK mark cannot be deleted or
divided. To delete or devide the clip, remove the
OK mark.
The CLIP INFO screen for the clip appears
and a confirmation message appears below
the index frame.
2
Select “Execute,” and press the jog dial
or the joystick.
The OK mark is applied to the selected clip.
Adding the OK mark
Deleting the OK mark
1
Select “OK MARK ADD” from the Clip
Operation menu.
For a clip already marked with OK, the Clip
Operation menu of the thumbnail screen permits
you to select “OK MARK DEL.”
Clip Operations
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABCD0002(2) if ABCD0002(1) exists
ABCD0005(4) if ABCD0005(3) exists
• If parenthetical numbers (1) to (9) already exist
as the result of repeated copying, copying to
that card cannot be done any more.
• A warning message is displayed if there is not
sufficient space on the destination SxS memory
card. Replace the SxS memory card with one
with sufficient space.
1
2
Select “OK MARK DEL” from the Clip
Operation menu.
The information screen for the selected clip
appears, and a confirmation message is
displayed below the index frame image.
To delete, select “Execute” then press
the jog dial or the joystick.
The OK mark is deleted from the selected clip.
To cancel copying on the way
Press the CANCEL button.
Copying is canceled and the thumbnail screen is
restored.
Copying a Clip
You can copy a clip selected on the thumbnail
screen to another SxS memory card.
Deleting a Clip
1
On the thumbnail screen of the current
memory card, select the clip you wish to
copy then press the joystick or the jog
dial.
You can delete a clip selected on the thumbnail
screen from the SxS memory card.
1
2
3
Select the clip you wish to delete on the
thumbnail screen then press the
joystick or the jog dial.
The Clip Operation menu of the thumbnail
screen pops up.
The Clip Operation menu of the thumbnail
screen pops up.
2
3
Select “COPY CLIP” from the Clip
Operation menu.
Select “DELETE CLIP” from the Clip
Operation menu.
The information screen of the selected clip
appears, and a confirmation message is
displayed below the index frame image.
The information screen for the selected clip
appears, and a confirmation message is
displayed below the index frame image.
To copy, select “Execute” then press the
jog dial or the joystick.
To delete, select “Execute” then press
the jog dial or the joystick.
Copying begins.
The clip is deleted.
The clip is copied with the same name to the
destination SxS memory card.
The subsequent clips are shifted by one on the
thumbnail screen.
An execution message and an in-progress bar are
displayed during copying.
When copying ends, the thumbnail screen is
restored.
Displaying the EXPAND CLIP
Screen
Notes
• If there is another clip having the same name on
the destination SxS memory card, the clip is
copied under a name adding a single-digit
number in parentheses to the end of the original
clip name.
The EXPAND CLIP screen permits you to divide
a clip into 12 blocks of equal duration and show a
thumbnail image of the first frame of each block
on the screen.
The parenthetical number is the minimum value
that does not exist in the destination memory
card.
Examples:
ABCD0002(1) if ABCD0002 exists
This helps you to quickly cue up to a desired
scene in a clip of long duration.
You can display the EXPAND CLIP screen by
selecting the clip on the thumbnail screen or on
the still picture of the clip in Pause mode.
Clip Operations
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Timecode indication
The timecode of the frame at the cursor is
displayed.
1
2
Pause the playback or select a clip on
the thumbnail screen then press the
joystick or the jog dial.
The corresponding Clip Operation menu
pops up.
Clip Operation menu on the EXPAND CLIP
screen
Select “EXPAND CLIP” from the Clip
Operation menu.
When you select a frame on the EXPAND CLIP
screen and press the joystick or the jog dial, the
Clip Operation menu pops up to enable further
operations.
The EXPAND CLIP screen appears for the
clip in Pause mode or that you selected on the
thumbnail screen.
Item
Function
EXPAND
(COARSE)
EXPAND
(FINE)
To decrease the number of
partitions of the clip
On the EXPAND CLIP screen displayed by using
the Clip Operation menu in Pause mode, the clip
is displayed with the finest possible partitions.
To increase the number of
partitions of the clip
PAUSE
To set to Pause mode at the
selected frame
EXPAND CLIP screen
SET INDEX PIC To specify the selected frame for
the index frame of the clip (page
Current frame number
120
m
in
EXPAND CLIP
01 : 10 : 30 : 00
01 : 11 : 10 : 00
01 : 11 : 50 : 00
0000123
SHOT MARK1
ADD
To add shot mark 1 to the selected
frame (page 106)
SHOT MARK2
ADD
To add shot mark 2 to the selected
frame (page 106)
01 :10 : 20 : 00
01 : 11 : 00 : 00
01 : 11 : 40 : 00
01:10:40:00
01:11:20:00
01:12:00:00
01:10:50:00
SHOT MARK1
DEL
To delete shot mark 1 from the
selected frame (page 106)
To delete shot mark 2 from the
selected frame (page 106)
S1
S2
01:11:30:00
SHOT MARK2
DEL
S2
S1
01:12:10:00
01/ JAN /2007 10:53
S
&
Q
Moti on 29 / 24fps TCR 01:10:20:00
DIVIDE CLIP
To divide the clip into two clips at
the selected frame (page 107)
( )
JPAN0011
1
HQ 1080 /24p
DUR 00:03:19:23
1
2
Displaying the SHOT MARK
Screen
Detailed information for the clip is displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
The items other than the following are the same as
those on the normal thumbnail screen:
When one or more shot marks are recorded for a
single clip, the SHOT MARK screen permits you
to display only the marked frames as the
thumbnail images on the screen.
1. Frame information
The following icons show the marking for the
frame at the cursor.
1
2
Select a clip on the thumbnail screen.
Index frame
Press the joystick or the jog dial.
Frame with shot mark 1 added
S1
The Clip Operation menu pops up.
Frame with shot mark 2 added
S2
3
Select “SHOT MARK,” “SHOT
MARK1,” or “SHOT MARK2.”
The same icons may also be displayed below the
thumbnail image of each frame. If the frame has
multiple markings, one of the icons is displayed,
in the priority order of index frame, shot mark 1,
and shot mark 2.
SHOT MARK: To display thumbnails only
of the frames marked with shot mark 1
and/or shot mark 2 recorded
SHOT MARK1: To display thumbnails only
of the frames marked with shot mark 1
Clip Operations
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SHOT MARK2: To display thumbnails only
of the frames marked with shot mark 2
Adding a shot mark in Pause mode
1
Pause the playback at the frame to
which you wish to add a shot mark then
press the joystick or the jog dial.
SHOT MARK screen example
120
m
in
SHOT MARK
01 : 10 : 30 : 00
01 : 11 : 10 : 00
- - -
0031 / 0031
The Clip Operation menu pops up.
S1
S1
S2
S1
S2
S1
01:10:50:00
01 : 10 : 20 : 00
01 : 11 : 00 : 00
- - -
01:10:40:00
2
Select “SHOT MARK1 ADD” or
“SHOT MARK2 ADD” from the Clip
Operation menu.
- - -
- - -
- - -
The information screen for the selected frame
appears, and a confirmation message is
displayed below the image.
- - -
01/ JAN /2007 10:53
S
&
Q
Moti on 29 / 24fps TCR 01:12:00:00
( )
JPAN0011
1
HQ 1080 /24p
DUR 00:03:19:23
3
Select “Execute.”
1
The detailed information of the clip is displayed
at the bottom of the screen.
The items other than the following are the same as
those on the EXPAND CLIP screen:
Adding a shot mark on the EXPAND CLIP
screen
1
2
Select the frame to which you wish to
add a shot mark on the EXPAND CLIP
screen then press the joystick or the jog
dial.
1. Timecode indication
The timecode of the frame at the cursor on the
SHOT MARK screen is displayed.
The Clip Operation menu pops up.
Clip Operation menu on the SHOT MARK
screen
Select “SHOT MARK1 ADD” or
“SHOT MARK2 ADD” from the Clip
Operation menu.
When you select a frame on the SHOT MARK
screen and press the joystick or the jog dial, the
Clip Operation menu pops up to permit you
further operations.
The information screen for the selected frame
appears, and a confirmation message is
displayed below the image.
Item
Function
PAUSE
To set to Pause mode at the selected
frame
3
Select “Execute.”
SET INDEX PIC To specify the selected frame for the
index frame of the clip (page 107)
Deleting a shot mark
SHOT MARK1 To delete the shot mark 1 from the
You can delete shot marks on the EXPAND CLIP
DEL
selected frame (page 106)
SHOT MARK2 To delete the shot mark 2 from the
DEL
selected frame (page 106)
DIVIDE CLIP
To divide the clip into two clips at
the selected frame (page 107)
1
Select a frame from which you wish to
delete the shot mark on the EXPAND
CLIP screen or the SHOT MARK
screen then press the joystick or the jog
dial.
Adding/Deleting Shot Marks
The Clip Operation menu pops up.
You can add shot marks to the clips after
recording or delete the recorded shot marks.
2
Select the “SHOT MARK1 DEL” or
“SHOT MARK2 DEL” from the Clip
Operation menu.
Clip Operations
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The information screen for the selected frame
appears and a confirmation message is
displayed below the image.
3
Select “Execute.”
The selected and subsequent frames are
divided, creating two clips having different
names.
3
Select “Execute.”
The first 4 characters of the original clip name are
carried on, continuing to the last number on the
memory card by the second 4 numerics.
Changing the Index Frame
Example: If you divide a clip named ABCD0002
into two clips under the condition where a
new clip will be named EFGH0100, clip
You can change the index frame of a clip to
another frame you selected on the EXPAND
ABCD0100 and clip ABCD0101 are created.
Note
1
Select a frame to be the index frame on
the EXPAND CLIP screen or the SHOT
MARK screen then press the joystick or
the jog dial.
If the remaining space on the memory card is
insufficient for divided clips, a message
informing you of it appears.
2
Select “SET INDEX PIC” from the Clip
Operation menu.
The information screen of the selected frame
appears and the confirmation message is
displayed below the image.
3
Select “Execute.”
Note
Even if you specify a frame other than the top
frame for the index frame, playback always
begins from the top frame when you start it from
the thumbnail screen.
Dividing a Clip
You can divide a clip into two different clips at
the frame you select on the EXPAND CLIP
1
Select the frame at which the clip is to
be divided on the EXPAND CLIP
screen or the SHOT MARK screen then
press the joystick or the jog dial.
The Clip Operation menu pops up.
2
Select “DIVIDE CLIP” from the Clip
Operation menu.
The information screen for the selected frame
appears, and a confirmation message is
displayed below the image.
Clip Operations
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Displays
Showing the Status Screens
This camcorder provides status screens of five
kinds in Camera mode and four kinds in Media
mode, permitting you to check the various
settings and statuses of this unit.
Canceling the status screen display
Press the STATUS button again. The status
screen display is canceled.
The status screens can also be displayed on an
external monitor.
Also, when the S&Q Motion dial is pressed or
when an external device is connected to the
REMOTE connector, the status display
disappears.
For connections of an external monitor, see
Available status screens
• CAMERA status screen (displayed only in
Camera mode) (page 109)
• AUDIO status screen (page 110)
• VIDEO status screen (page 111)
• BUTTON/REMOTE status screen (page 111)
• BATTERY/MEDIA status screen (page 112)
R
L
CE
R
CAN
O
IT
ON VO
D
L
T
/SE
SEL
F
F
W
M
E
S
U
A
P
T
L
AIL
Y/
A
L
P
NEX
/
P
O
T
V
HUMBN
T
S
P
O
F
RE
C
T
/S
E
R
T
R
A
PREV
T
S
D
L
O
H
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
B
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
40
m
T
U
O
I
D
IR
IS
S
9
.
5
2
1
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
2
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
O
IN
EX
K
SI
S
C
O
2
G
N
6
.
T
NL
1
E
G
5
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
TC
2
A
U
D
A
S
I
N
C
1
T
E
IO
E
EX
D
U
TO
U
A
L
A
V
L
C
LE
UA
N
1
MA
2
TE
O
-
+
H-
MA
C
EM
NU
PU
R
AU
AF
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
C
T
GA
O
IN
FF
W
HIT
E
B
AL
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
PR
ST
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
STATUS
MENU
SEL/SET
CANCEL
MONITOR VOL
THUMBNAIL SEL/SET CANCEL
Jog dial
STATUS button
Joystick
Activating the status screen display
Press the STATUS button.
Switching the status screens
Operating the joystick or the jog dial switches the
screens in sequence.
Showing the Status Screens
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
The display is not available when a non-serial
lens is mounted.
CAMERA Status Screen
Zebra: Zebra status
Display Contents
The settings and statuses related to image
shooting are displayed.
The CAMERA status screen is obtained only in
Camera mode. It is not displayed in Media mode.
1
This indication becomes “On” if you turn
zebra on with the ZEBRA button when “1”
or “Both” is selected for “Zebra Select” of
the VF SET menu. The setting value of
“Zebra1 Level” of the VF SET menu is
displayed at the right.
CA
MERA
1/5
W
hite Bal B: 12000K
A : 4700K
Gain L : 0dB
M: 9dB
It shows “Off” when zebra is off or “2” is
selected for “Zebra Select.”
PRST
:
3200K
H: 18dB
H
andle
Z
oo
m
S
peed H: 70
Zebra1:
O
O
n
f f
70%
2
This indication becomes “On” if you turn
zebra on with the ZEBRA button when “2”
or “Both” is selected for “Zebra Select” of
the VF SET menu.
L: 30
2:
Skin Tone
Pict ure Prof i l e
D
etai l :
O
f f
LensID: Standard_Lens
:
PP1 STANDARD
It shows “Off” when zebra is off or “1” is
selected for “Zebra Select.”
White Bal: White balance status
Display Contents
B
The color temperature stored in white
memory B is indicated. The color
Skin Tone Detail: Skin-tone detail status
The current status (On or Off) of “Setting” of
“Skin Tone Detail” of the PICTURE PROFILE
menu is displayed.
temperature of white memory B is detected/
stored when you execute the auto white
balance operation in Memory B mode.
The color temperature stored in white
memory A is indicated. The color
temperature of white memory A is
detected/stored when you execute the auto
white balance operation in Memory A
mode.
A
Lens ID
The ID of the mounted lens is displayed.
Note
The display is not available when a non-serial
lens is mounted.
PRST
The color temperature set as the preset
white is indicated. The color temperature of
preset white can be changed using the
PICTURE PROFILE menu.
Picture Profile: Picture Profile selection status
The selected Picture Profile number and name are
displayed. (If Picture Profile is off, “Off” is
displayed.)
Gain: GAIN switch settings
The gain values of the positions L, M, and H of
the GAIN switch assigned with the CAMERA
SET menu are displayed.
Handle Zoom Speed: Handle zoom speed
settings
The speed values assigned to the on-handle
ZOOM button on the CAMERA SET menu are
displayed.
Display Contents
H
Speed obtained when the speed switch is
set to the H position
L
Speed obtained when the speed switch is
set to the L position
CAMERA Status Screen
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Media Mode
AUDIO Status Screen
AUDIO
1/4
CH-3
CH-4
oo
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
OVER
Information regarding audio signals is displayed.
The display configuration varies between Camera
mode and Media mode.
O
utput
C
H
:
:
:
CH-3/CH-4
CH-3/CH-4
CH-3+CH-4
Headphones
peaker
S
CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4: Audio level meters
The playback audio levels of CH-1/CH-2 or CH-
3/CH-4 are displayed according to the “Output
CH” setting of the AUDIO SET menu.
If audio input is fed in via the i.LINK connector
in STOP status or in external input recording, the
input audio levels are indicated. In this case, the
channel indications at the left of the meters are
CH-1 and CH-2 regardless of the “Output CH”
setting of the AUDIO SET menu.
In Camera Mode
AUDIO
CH-1
2/5
CH-2
oo
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
OVER
W
ind Fi l ter CH-1:
CH-2:
O
O
n
n
AGC Link: Linked
EXT-1
EXT-2
CH-1
CH-2
In other conditions, the meters do not function.
CH-1/CH-2: Audio level meters
Output CH: Output channel setting
The “Output CH” setting of the AUDIO SET
menu is displayed.
The levels of the CH-1 and CH-2 audio inputs (E-
E audio levels) are displayed.
Wind Filter: Wind filter settings
The current settings of “Wind Filter CH-1” and
“Wind Filter CH-2” of the AUDIO SET menu are
displayed.
Headphones: Headphone output
The output audio channel(s) for the headphones
is(are) displayed. The “Monitor CH” setting of
the AUDIO SET menu is valid as-is.
AGC Link: AGC link status
Speaker: Speaker output
The “AGC Link” status (Linked or Separate) of
The output audio channel(s) for the built-in
speaker is(are) displayed. As the speaker is
monaural, the outputs are CH-1+CH2 or CH-
3+CH4 even in stereo mode.
With nonstereo settings, the “Monitor CH”
setting of the AUDIO SET menu is valid as-is.
the AUDIO SET menu is displayed.
INT/EXT–CH-1/CH-2: Audio input settings
The inputs to CH-1 and CH-2 according to the
“EXT CH Select” setting of the AUDIO SET
menu and the AUDIO IN switch status are
displayed.
AUDIO IN EXT CH Display
switch
Select
CH-1: INT
CH-2: INT
—
INT-L
INT-R
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1: EXT
CH-2: INT
—
—
EXT-1
INT-R
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1: INT
CH-2: EXT
INT-L
EXT-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1: EXT CH-1/CH-2
CH-2: EXT
EXT-1
EXT-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1: EXT CH-1
CH-2: EXT
EXT-1
EXT-2
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO Status Screen
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VIDEO Status Screen
BUTTON/REMOTE Status
Screen
The information on video formats and settings for
the COMPONENT OUT, SDI OUT, MONITOR
OUT, S VIDEO, and i.LINK connectors is
displayed.
The functions assigned to the assignable buttons
and the status of the IR Remote Commander are
displayed.
BUTTON /RE
M
OTE
4/5
Assign But ton 1: Freeze
M
ix
VIDEO
V ideo For
Rec ode
YP r /SD
V ideo
3/5
2:
3:
O
O
ff
ff
m
at
:
:
:
:
:
:
1080/60i
HQ
1080/60i
NTSC
Squeeze
Disable
M
P
4: Rec Review
b
I
O
ut
O
ut
I R Rem
ote
:
On
Down
Conver ter
i .
L
I
NK I /
O
Assign Button: Assignable button statuses
Video Format: Video format setting
The functions assigned with the “Assign Button”
of the OTHERS menu to the respective
assignable buttons are displayed.
The picture size (effective vertical lines), frame
rate, and scan format set in “Video Format” of the
OTHERS menu are displayed.
IR Remote: IR Remote Commander status
The status (On: enabled, Off: disabled) of the IR
Remote Commander is displayed.
Rec Mode: Recording bit rate
The bit rate (HQ or SP) set in “Video Format” of
the OTHERS menu is displayed.
YPbPr/SDI Out: Component and SDI output status
The picture size (effective vertical lines), frame
rate, and scan format of the signal being fed from
the COMPONENT OUT and SDI OUT
connectors according to the “YPbPr/SDI Out
Select” setting of the VIDEO SET menu are
displayed.
Video Out: Output status of the MONITOR OUT
and S VIDEO connectors
The format (NTSC or PAL) of the analog
composite signal being fed from the MONITOR
OUT connector and S VIDEO connector is
displayed.
Down Converter: Down-converter setting of the
SD output
The “Down Converter” setting (Squeeze, Edge
Crop, Letterbox) of the VIDEO SET menu is
displayed.
i.LINK I/O: i.LINK I/O status
The i.LINK I/O setting (Enable /Disable) of the
OTHERS menu is displayed.
VIDEO Status Screen / BUTTON/REMOTE Status Screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
111
BATTERY/MEDIA Status
Screen
The information on the battery pack and SxS
memory cards is displayed.
BATTERY/
Bat tery
MEDIA
5/5
Charge
Count 55
HDD
HDD
A
B
0
0
50
50
100
100
%
%
M
M
edia
edia
A
B
20
50
m
m
in
in
P
rotected
Battery: Battery charge remaining
The remaining charge level of the mounted
battery pack is displayed.
Charge Count: Repeated charge times
The number of times that the mounted battery
pack has been charged is displayed.
HDD A/HDD B: Battery remaining of PHU-60K
units
When PHU-60K Professional Hard Disk units are
connected, the remaining power levels of the
batteries of the PHU-60K units connected via the
respective card slots are displayed.
Media A/Media B: Remaining space and
available recording time
The remaining space of the SxS memory cards in
the respective card slots are indicated on the
meters.
At the right, the available time for recording if
done at the current bit rate is displayed, in
minutes.
The time indication will be “- - min” if no SxS
memory card or an invalid card is in the slot.
If the card is write-protected, “Protected” is
shown to the right of the time indication.
BATTERY/MEDIA Status Screen
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Overview of the Setup Menus
This camcorder permits you to make various
settings for recording and playback with Setup
menus in the viewfinder.
Setup Menu Layers
The Setup menus can also be displayed on an
external monitor.
MENU
CAMERA SET
Auto BLK Balance
For connections of an external monitor, see
Gain Setup
Shutter
EX Slow Shutter
Shot Transition
MF Assist
Setup Menu Configuration
Color Bar Type
Flicker Reduce
Zoom Speed
Interval Rec
Frame Rec
The following menu icons are displayed when
you press the MENU button, permitting you to
select the corresponding menus.
CAMERA SET menu
S&Q Motion
Rec Review
Fader
For setting the items related to recording other
The picture-quality items are set with the PICTURE
TLCS
Shockless White
White Switch
ATW Speed
Wide Conversion
AUDIO SET menu
VIDEO SET menu
For setting the items related to video outputs
AUDIO SET
Audio Input
Audio Output
VF SET menu
For setting the items related to the displays in the
VIDEO SET
YPbPr/SDI Out Select
YPbPr/SDI Out Display
Video Out Display
Setup
00:00
TC/UB SET menu
For setting the items related to timecodes and user
Down Converter
VF SET
VF
LENS menu
Peaking
Marker
Zebra
OTHERS menu
Display On/Off
TC/UB SET
Timecode
Users Bit
TC Format
(continues)
Overview of the Setup Menus
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
113
LENS
Auto FB ADJ
File
Basic Menu Operations
Flare
Shading
This section covers basic operations for setting
the Setup menu items.
OTHERS
All Reset
Camera Data
Time Zone
Clock Set
Menu controls
Language
Assign Button
Tally
R
EL
C
AN
C
R
O
WD
NIT
O
L
V
O
M
F
F
E
SEL/SET
S
U
A
/P
Y
A
L
P
T
L
EX
N
AIL
MN
/
P
O
THU
ST
P
O
T
F
REV
C
RE /S
R
A
V
RE
T
P
T
S
Hours Meter
IR Remote
Battery Alarm
Battery INFO
Genlock
D
L
O
H
1
6
:9
W
ID
E
S
C
R
E
E
N
B
TC
/U-
BIT
/DU
RA
TION
t
f
m
40
m
T
U
O
I
SD
IR
IS
9
.
5
2
1
LE
NS
IN
FO
0
.8
BR
T
0
D
ISP
3
2
1
HI
3
M
STO
G
AN
U
RAM
AU
TO
CT
E
4
L
E
1
5
MA
T
S
IN
1
5
CR
O
AS
L
O
IN
EX
K
SI
S
C
2
G
N
6
.
T
NLO
0
E
G
5
TO
U
A
AL
T
0
NU
3
SS
A
1
E
M
IO
D
IN
C
8
.
8
AC
AU
OF
B
F
-1
H
C
5
ON
FOCUS
IO
LE
IN
TC
2
A
U
D
A
S
I
N
C
1
T
E
IO
EX
D
U
TO
U
A
L
E
A
V
E
AL
C
L
NU
1
MA
2
H-
TE
O
-
+
MA
C
EM
NU
PU
R
AU
AF
FU
TO
LL
SH
A
UT
F
RA
O
M
E
T
U
O
GA
TC
O
IN
FF
W
HIT
E
BA
L
L
BA
RS
3
X
-E
M
H
/C
AM
A
T
W
B
A
W
M
Direct Menu
i.LINK I/O
PRS
T
P
N
E
P
O
S
T
A
T
U
S
M
E
N
U
SE
L/
SE
T
CA
NC
P
ICT
PR
OF
EL
UR
E
E
IL
C
A
M
ER
A
OF
F
M
ED
IA
Trigger Mode
Country
STATUS
MENU
SEL/SET
CANCEL
MONITOR VOL
Video Format
Clip
THUMBNAIL SEL/SET CANCEL
Format Media
MENU button
Jog dial
Joystick
CANCEL button
CANCEL button
MENU button
To turn Menu mode to use Setup menus on/off.
Joystick (SEL/SET button)
When you tilt it, the cursor moves in the
corresponding direction, permitting you to select
menu items or setting values.
Jog dial (SEL/SET dial)
When you turn the dial, the cursor moves up or
down, permitting you to select menu items or
setting values.
CANCEL button
To return to the previous layer of the menu. An
uncompleted change is canceled.
Displaying the Setup menu
Press the MENU button.
The menu icons appear on the screen.
Basic Menu Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114
The cursor is displayed on the icon of the menu
used last, and the corresponding menu item
selection area is displayed to the right.
C
A
M
E
R
A
SET
A
uto BLK alance
B
B
B
B
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
Example: When the cursor is located at
(CAMERA SET menu icon)
00:00
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
S
lo
w
Shutter
A
:
Of f
Menu icon
Displayed when there are more
menu items beneath. (v shown at
the top indicates that there are
more menu items above.)
C
A
M
E
R
A
SET
A
uto BLK alance
B
B
B
B
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
00:00
S
lo
w
Shutter
Menu item selection area
• A B symbol is displayed to the right of any item
that has subitems.
A
:
Of f
Menu item selection area
• The current setting value is displayed to the right
of an item that has no subitems.
• To return to the previous layer, select
the joystick to the left.
or tilt
Note
When the camcorder is in EXPAND FOCUS
operated. Press the EXPAND FOCUS button to
release the mode.
3
Turn the jog dial or tilt the joystick
back or forth to set the cursor to the
menu item you wish to set then press the
dial or the joystick to proceed.
Setting the Setup menus
The setting area appears to the right of the
menu item selection area, and the cursor
moves to the top of its subitems.
1
Rotate the jog dial or tilt the joystick
back or forth to set the cursor to the
icon of the menu you wish to set.
CA
ME
RA
SET
The selectable menu items are displayed in
the menu item selection area to the right of
the icon.
A
uto BLK alance
B
B
B
B
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
Low
Mid
High
:
:
:
0dB
9dB
18dB
00:00
S
lo
w
Shutter
2
Press the jog dial or the joystick.
A
:
Of f
The cursor moves to the menu item selection
area.
Setting area
• The subitems and their current values are
displayed.
You can also move the cursor to the menu
item selection area by tilting the joystick to
the right.
• The menu item selection area can show 7
lines at maximum. When all the selectable
items cannot be displayed at one time, you
can scroll the display up or down by
moving the cursor.
• To return to the previous layer, select
the joystick to the left, or press the CANCEL
button.
, tilt
When you select an item that has no subitems
and to be only On /Off or switched, the
choices are displayed to the right of the item.
In this case, proceed to step 5.
A triangle appears at the upper or lower
right corner of the menu item selection area
to indicate that scrolling is enabled.
Basic Menu Operations
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For an item that requires your confirmation
When you select an item that you must confirm
before execution in step 3, the menu display
temporarily disappears, and a confirmation
message is displayed. Following the instructions
of message, specify whether to execute or cancel.
Example
CA
MER
A
SET
B
A
uto BLK alance
B
B
B
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
olor ar Type
S
lo
w
Shutter
00:00
On
Of f
A
:
B
Entering a character string
C
B
When you select an item for which a character
string, such as a time value or filename, is to be
specified, the input area for the character string is
highlighted, and “SET” appears at the right end.
Choices
4
For the item that has subitems, turn the
jog dial or tilt the joystick back or forth
to set the cursor to the subitem you wish
to set then press the dial or the joystick
to proceed.
1
Select characters by turning the jog dial
or tilting the joystick back and forth
then press the dial or joystick to
proceed.
The available values of the selected subitems
are displayed, and the cursor moves to the
current value.
The cursor moves to the next column.
To return to the previous column, tilt the
joystick to the left.
CA
ME
RA
SET
18dB
12dB
9dB
6dB
3dB
A
uto BLK alance
B
2
3
Perform setting in the same manner up
to the last column/digit.
B
B
B
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
Low
Mid
High
:
:
00:00
S
lo
w
S
hutter
The cursor moves to “SET.”
0dB
-3dB
A
:
Of f
Press the jog dial or the joystick.
The setting is completed.
Available value area
• The available value area can show 7 lines at
maximum. When all the selectable values
cannot be displayed at one time, you can
scroll the display up or down by moving the
cursor.
Terminating the menu operation
Press the MENU button.
The normal camera picture is resumed.
A triangle appears at the upper or lower
right corner of the available value area to
indicate that scrolling is enabled.
• For items having a wide range of available
values (example: –99 to +99), the available
value area is not displayed. The current
setting is highlighted instead, indicating
that the setting is ready for change.
5
Select the desired value by turning the
jog dial or tilting the joystick back or
forth then press the dial or the joystick
to make the setting.
The setting is changed, and the new setting is
displayed.
When you select “Execute” for an execution
item, the corresponding function is executed.
Basic Menu Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116
Setup Menu List
The functions and available settings of menus are listed below.
The default settings set at the factory are shown in bold face (example: Speed).
CAMERA SET Menu
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Execute/Cancel Select “Execute” to start the automatic black balance
Auto BLK
Balance
adjustment.
Adjusting the
black balance
automatically
Low
–3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /12 /18 dB
Mid
–3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /12 /18 dB
High
–3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /12 / 18 dB
Mode
Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the L
position.
Gain Setup
Assigning gain
levels to the three
GAIN switch
positions
Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the M
position.
Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the H
position.
Select modes of the Electronic Shutter.
Shutter
Speed / Angle / ECS / SLS
Specifying
operating
Shutter Speed
Set the shutter speed when Speed mode is selected.
conditions of the
electrical shutter
1/100
The available setting values vary depending on the video
Shutter Angle
Set the shutter angle when Angle mode is selected.
180º / 90º / 45º / 22.5º / 11.25º
ECS Frequency
Set the ECS frequency when ECS mode is selected.
60.02
The available setting values vary depending on the frame rate
of the video format selected.
SLS Frame
2 to 8
Set the number of frames to accumulate when SLS mode is
selected.
Setting
Turn EX Slow Shutter mode on/off.
EX Slow
On / Off
Shutter
Setting the
Number of Frames
Set the number of frames to accumulate.
Supersensitized
Slow Shutter mode
16 / 32 / 64
Setup Menu List
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Shot
Subitems and setting values Contents
Trans Time Set the time it takes to make a shot transition.
2 to 15 sec (4 sec)
1)
Transition
Setting the
Trans Speed
Set the speed of the transition.
operating
1 to 10 (5)
conditions of Shot
Transition
Time / Speed
Time / Speed
Determine whether to specify the transition by time or speed.
Select the transition pattern.
Trans Curve
Linear / Soft Trans / Soft Stop Linear: To make the transition linearly
Soft Trans: To make the transition slowly at the beginning and
end, but linearly in between
Soft Stop: To make the transition slow down near the end
Start Timer
Off / 5 sec / 10 sec / 20 sec
Rec Link
Off / Shot-A / Shot-B
Set the waiting time until the shot transition begins.
Set the function to start a shot transition linked to recording
start.
Off: To start the transition using a button without linked to
recording start
Shot-A: To start a transition to Shot-A linked to recording
start
Shot-B: To start a transition to Shot-B linked to recording
start
1)
On / Off
Set to “On” to precisely adjust the focus automatically after
you roughly adjust it manually.
MF Assist
Turning the MF
Assist Function
on/off
Multi / 75% / 100%
Select the type of color bars displayed when you press the
BARS/CAM button.
Multi: To output multiformat color bars
75%: To output 75% color bars
Color Bar Type
Selecting the types
of color bar
100%: To output 100% color bars
Mode
Auto / On / Off
Set the operation of the Flicker-Reduction function.
On: To always activate it
Auto: To automatically activate it when flicker is detected.
Off: To not activate it
Flicker Reduce
Setting Flicker
Compensation
Off: UC model
Auto: Other models
Frequency
50 Hz / 60 Hz
Set to the power supply frequency of the light source causing
flicker.
60 Hz: UC model
50 Hz: Other models
Note:If you set a value between 0 and 9, zooming may not operate smoothly, depending on the
Zoom Speed
Setting the zoom
speed
individual characteristics of the lens or operating environments.
High
0 to 99 (70)
Set the speed of zooming to be executed when you press the
on-handle ZOOM button with the zoom speed switch set to
H.
Low
0 to 99 (30)
Remote
0 to 99 (50)
Set the speed of zooming to be executed when you press the
on-handle ZOOM button with the zoom speed switch set to L.
Set the speed of zooming to be executed when you press the
ZOOM button of the IR Remote Commander.
Setup Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Setting Turn the Interval Recording function on/off.
Interval Rec
Setting the Interval
Recording
On / Off
Interval Time
Set the interval of recording in Interval Recording.
function
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min
1 to 4/6/12/24 hour
Number of Frames
1 / 3 / 6 / 9 or
Set the number of frames to be recorded at a time in Interval
Recording.
2 / 6 /12 (720/60P, 720/50P)
Setting
On / Off
Turn the Frame Recording function on/off.
Frame Rec
Setting the Frame
Recording
Number of Frames
1 / 3 / 6 / 9 or
Set the number of frames to be recorded at a time in Frame
Recording.
function
2 / 6 /12 (720/60P, 720/50P)
2)
Setting
Turn the Slow & Quick Motion function on/off.
S&Q Motion
On / Off
Setting the S&Q
Motion function
Frame Rate
Set the recording frame rate in Slow & Quick Motion
recording.
1 to 30 (1080 size)
1 to 60 (720 size)
3 sec / 10 sec / Clip
Set the time to play the last recorded clip using the Rec-
Review function.
Rec Review
Setting the
3 sec: Last 3 seconds
10 sec: Last 10 seconds
playback time for
Rec-Review
Clip: Entire duration of the clip
Fade In
Turn the fade-in function on/off.
Fader
On / Off
Setting the fade-in/
fade-out functions
Fade In Type
Select the fade-in mode.
White / Black
White: To fade in from a white screen
Black: To face in from a black screen
Fade In Time
Set the duration of the fade in.
1 sec / 2 sec / 3 sec / 5 sec /
10 sec
Fade Out
Turn the fade-out function on/off.
On / Off
Fade Out Type
Select the fade-out mode.
White / Black
White: To fade out to a white screen
Black: To face out to a black screen
Fade Out Time
Set the duration of the fade out.
1 sec / 2 sec / 3 sec / 5 sec /
10 sec
Setup Menu List
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Level Set the target level (to make brighter or darker) of auto iris
+1.0 / +0.5 / ±0 / –0.5 / –1.0
3)
TLCS
control in TLCS. (This setting also affects the gain control in
AGC mode and shutter-speed control in Auto Shutter mode.)
+1.0: Approx. one stop further open
Setting the Total
Level Control
System (auto
adjustment system
of gain, iris and
shutter)
+0.5: Approx. half a stop further open
±0: Standard
–0.5: Approx. half a stop further closed
–1.0: Approx. one stop further closed
Mode
Backlight / Standard /
Spotlight
Set the auto iris control mode in TLCS.
Backlight: Backlight mode to reduce darkening of the center
subject against lights
Standard: Standard mode
Spotlight: Spotlight mode to reduce blown-out highlights on
the center subject in the spotlight
Speed
–99 to +99 (+50)
AGC
Set the tracing speed of TLCS control.
Turn the AGC (Auto Gain Control) function on/off.
Set the maximum gain in AGC.
On / Off
AGC Limit
3 / 6 / 9 / 12 / 18 dB
AGC Point
F5.6 / F4 / F2.8
Set the iris point for switching to auto-iris and auto-shutter
control when AGC is on.
Auto Shutter
Turn the Auto Shutter control function on/off.
On / Off
A.SHT Limit
1/100
Set the maximum shutter speed in Auto Shutter control.
1/150
1/200
1/250
A.SHT Point
F5.6 / F8 / F11 / F16
Set the iris point for switching auto-iris and auto-shutter
control when Auto Shutter is on.
Off / 1 / 2 / 3
Select the speed of change in white balance when the white
balance mode is switched.
Shockless
White
Set to “Off” to instantly change the white balance.
Select a larger number to change the white balance more
slowly through interpolation.
Setting the
shockless white
balance
ATW / MEM
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5
On / Off
Select the mode (ATW or Memory B) selected at the B
position of the WHITE BAL switch.
White Switch
Setting for the
WHITE BAL
switch
Set the tracing speed of ATW.
The larger the number you set, the speed becomes faster.
ATW Speed
Setting for Auto
Tracing White
Balance
Set to “On” when a wide conversion lens is attached.
Wide
Conversion
1)
Setting for use of a
wide conversion
lens
1) Valid with exclusive lenses only
Setup Menu List
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2)Valid only when the RM-B750/B150 Remote Control
Unit is connected
3)If the mouted lens does not have Auto Iris function,
only the gain and shutter are adjusted automatically.
AUDIO SET Menu
AUDIO SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
TRIM CH-1
Finely adjust the sensitivity of channel 1 of external
Audio Input
Setting for audio
inputs
–11 dBu to –65 dBu (–41 dBu) microphone input in steps of 6 dB.
TRIM CH-2
Finely adjust the sensitivity of channel 2 of external
–11 dBu to –65 dBu (–41 dBu) microphone input in steps of 6 dB.
AGC Link
Linked / Separated
Select the gain link condition when the audio level adjustment
is in AGC mode.
Linked: To vary the CH-1 gain and the CH-2 gain in
synchronization.
Separated: To vary the CH-1 gain and the CH-2 gain
independently according to the respective levels.
1KHz Tone
On / Off
Turn the 1-kHz reference tone signal on/off.
Turn the wind filter for channel 1 on/off.
Turn the wind filter for channel 2 on/off.
Wind Filter CH-1
On / Off
Wind Filter CH-2
On / Off
EXT CH Select
CH-1
CH-1: To record channel 1 audio input on both channels 1
and 2.
CH-1/CH-2
CH-1/CH-2: To record channel 1 and channel 2 inputs on the
respective channels.
Monitor CH
Select the audio channel(s) to be fed to the headphones and
the built-in speaker.
CH-1/CH-2 (CH-3/CH-4): Stereo
CH-1+CH-2 (CH-3+CH-4): Mix
CH-1 (CH-3): CH-1 (CH-3) only
CH-2 (CH-4): CH-2 (CH-4) only
Audio Output
Setting for audio
outputs
CH-1/CH-2 (CH-3/CH-4)
CH-1+CH-2 (CH-3+CH-4)
CH-1 (CH-3)
CH-2 (CH-4)
(
): with Output CH set to “CH-3/CH-4”
Output CH
CH-1/CH-2
CH-3/CH-4
Select audio output channels from either channels 1 and 2 or
channels 3 and 4.
Alarm Level
Set the alarm sound volume.
0 to 10 (5)
Beep
Select whether or not to sound a beep upon each operation.
On / Off
Setup Menu List
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VIDEO SET Menu
VIDEO SET
Menu items
Setting values
Contents
HD / SD/ Off
Select the output signal from the COMPONENT OUT
connector and the SDI OUT connector.
HD: To output the same HD signal as that in recording and
playback
SD: To output a down-converted SD signal
Off: No output
YPbPr/SDI Out
Select
Setting the
component/SDI
outputs
On / Off
Set whether to add the same menus and status indications as
those in the viewfinder to the output signals from the
COMPONENT OUT connector and the SDI OUT connector.
YPbPr/SDI Out
Display
Setting the
character
information for the
component/SDI
outputs
On / Off
Set whether to add the same menus and status indications as
those in the viewfinder to the output signal from the
MONITOR OUT and S VIDEO connectors.
Video Out
Display
Setting the
character
information for the
composite output
Note
On the thumbnail, EXPAND CLIP and SHOTMARK screens,
the same menus and status indications as those in the
viewfinder are displayed regardless of the setting of this item.
Markers or patterns are not displayed regardless of the setting
of this item.
Set whether to add 7.5% setup to the output signal from the
MONITOR OUT and S VIDEO connectors when a format of
NTSC is selected (Invalid when a format of PAL is selected).
Setup
On / Off
Setting 7.5% setup
for the composite
signal
Note
The default setting is different among the sales areas.
United States and Canada: On
Other areas: Off
Squeeze / Letterbox / Edge
Crop
Set the output mode (aspect) for SD output from the
MONITOR OUT, S VIDEO, COMPONENT OUT, and SDI
OUT connectors.
Squeeze: To horizontally reduce a 16:9 picture to output a 4:3
picture
Down
Converter
Selecting the
operation mode of
the down converter
Letterbox: To mask the upper and lower areas of a 4:3 picture
to display a 16:9 picture in the center of the screen
Edge Crop: To cut the both sides of a 16:9 picture to output a
4:3 picture
Setup Menu List
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VF SET Menu
VF SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Color Adjust the color of pictures in the viewfinder.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Mode
Color / B&W
VF
Setting the
viewfinder
Select the display mode of the viewfinder.
Color: Color mode
B&W: Monochrome mode
Type
Normal / Color
Select the circuit to be used for the peaking function.
Normal: To use the VF DETAIL circuit of the viewfinder
Color: To use the peaking circuit of the camcorder
Peaking
Setting the peaking
function for the
viewfinder
Color
White / Red / Yellow / Blue
Frequency
Normal / High
Setting
When you select “Color” for “Type,” select the color of the
peaking signal.
When you select “Nornal” for “Type,” select the frequency to
be detected by the VF DETAIL circuit.
Turn all marker indications on/off in combination.
Marker
On / Off
Setting the
markers added to
pictures in the
viewfinder
Safety Zone
On / Off
Turn the safety marker on/off.
Safety Area
80% / 90% / 92.5% / 95%
Select the size (ratio to the entire screen) of the safety zone
marker.
Center Marker
Turn the center marker on/off.
On / Off
Aspect Marker
On / Off
Turn the aspect marker on/off.
Select the type of the aspect marker.
Turn the guide frame marker on/off.
Aspect Select
4:3 / 13:9 / 14:9 / 15:9
Guide Frame
On / Off
Zebra Select
1 / 2 / Both
Select the zebra pattern(s) to be displayed.
1: To display zebra 1 only
2: To display zebra 2 only
Zebra
Setting the zebra
pattern
Both: To display both zebra 1 and zebra 2
Zebra1 Level
Set the display level of zebra 1.
50 to 107 (70)
Setup Menu List
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VF SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Video Level Warnings
On / Off
Turn the warning indication to be displayed when the picture
is too bright or too dark on/off.
Display On/Off
Selecting the items
to be displayed in
the viewfinder
Brightness Display
On / Off
Turn the numeric indication to show the picture brightness on/
off.
Histogram
On / Off
Turn the histogram indication to show the level distribution of
the picture on/off.
Select the depth-of-field indication.
Meter: To indicate in meters
Feet: To indicate in feet
Lens Info
Meter / Feet / Off
Off: To not indicate
Select the type of zoom position indication.
Number: Indication with a number
Bar: Indication with a bar
Zoom Position
Number / Bar / Off
Off: To not display
(only when a serial lens is mounted)
Audio Level Meter
Turn the audio level meter indication on/off.
On / Off
Timecode
On / Off
Turn the time data (timecode, user bits, duration) indication
on/off.
Battery Remain
On / Off
Turn the battery remaining/DC input voltage indication on/
off.
Media Remain
Turn the media remaining indication on/off.
On / Off
TLCS Mode
Turn the TLCS mode indication on/off.
On / Off
Turn the Steady Shot indication on/off.
(only when the exclusive lens is mounted)
Steady Shot
On / Off
Turn the focus operation mode indication on/off.
(only when an auto-focus lens is mounted)
Focus Mode
On / Off
White Balance Mode
On / Off
Turn the white balance mode indication on/off.
Turn the Picture Profile indication on/off.
Turn the ND filter setting indication on/off.
Turn the iris setting indication on/off.
Picture Profile
On / Off
Filter Position
On / Off
1)
Iris Position
On / Off
Gain Setting
Turn the gain setting indication on/off.
On / Off
Shutter Setting
On / Off
Turn the shutter mode and speed indication on/off.
Turn the fader operation mode indication on/off.
Fader Status
On / Off
Rec Mode
On / Off
Turn the special recording mode (Frame Rec, Interval Rec,
S&Q Motion) indication on/off.
Video Format
Turn the video format indication on/off.
On / Off
Setup Menu List
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TC/UB SET Menu
TC/UB SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Mode
Preset / Regen / Clock
Set the timecode mode.
Timecode
Setting the
timecode
Preset: To start the timecode from the specified value
Regen (regeneration): To continue the timecode from that of
the previous clip
Clock: To use the current clock time as the timecode
Run
Rec Run / Free Run
Set the running mode when the timecode mode is set to
“Preset.”
Rec Run: The timecode advances only in recording mode.
Free Run: The timecode keeps advancing regardless of
recording.
Setting
Reset
Set the timecode to a desired value.
Select “SET” to finish the setting.
Select “Execute” to reset the timecode to 00:00:00:00.
Execute / Cancel
Mode
Fix / Date
Set the user bit mode.
Fix: To use a desired fixed value as the user bits
Date: To use the current date
Users Bit
Setting the user
bits
Setting
DF / NDF
Set the user bits to a desired value.
Set the timecode format.
DF: Drop frame
TC Format
Setting the
NDF: Non drop frame
timecode format
LENS Menu
LENS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Execute/Cancel Select “Execute” to start the automatic adjustment of the
Auto FB ADJ
Adjusting the
flange focal length.
flange focal length
Lens ID
The ID of the mounted lens is displayed (for serial lenses
only).
File
Retrieving/storing
lens files
Recall
Retrieve the lens file.
Store
Store the data in the lens files.
Set the filename of the lens file being selected.
File ID
No Offset
Execute/Cancel
Select “Execute” to clear the lens compensation data to the
factory-set condition.
Auto Recall
On / Off
Turn the function to automatically retrieve the lens file whose
Lens ID is identical to that of the mounted lens.
Setup Menu List
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LENS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
R Flare Adjust the flare (R).
–99 to +99 (±0)
G Flare
–99 to +99 (±0)
B Flare
–99 to +99 (±0)
R Flare EX
–99 to +99 (±0)
G Flare EX
–99 to +99 (±0)
B Flare EX
–99 to +99 (±0)
Flare
Adjusting the flare
for a lens
Adjust the flare (G).
Adjust the flare (B).
Adjust the flare (R) (when an extender is in use).
Adjust the flare (G) (when an extender is in use).
Adjust the flare (B) (when an extender is in use).
Select the target channel for the shading adjustments.
Adjust the master V modulation shading.
Compensate the H Saw shading.
Shading CH
R / G / B
Shading
Adjusting the lens
shading
M VMOD
–99 to +99 (±0)
H SAW
–99 to +99 (±0)
H PARA
Compensate the H Para shading.
–99 to +99 (±0)
V SAW
Compensate the V Saw shading.
–99 to +99 (±0)
V PARA
Compensate the V Para shading.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Shading CH EX
R / G / B
Select the target channel for the shading adjustments (when
an extender is in use).
M VMOD EX
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the master V modulation shading (when an extender is
in use).
H SAW EX
–99 to +99 (±0)
Compensate the H Saw shading (when an extender is in use).
Compensate the H Para shading (when an extender is in use).
Compensate the V Saw shading (when an extender is in use).
Compensate the V Para shading (when an extender is in use).
H PARA EX
–99 to +99 (±0)
V SAW EX
–99 to +99 (±0)
V PARA EX
–99 to +99 (±0)
Setup Menu List
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OTHERS Menu
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Execute/Cancel
Select “Execute” to reset the camcorder to the factory status.
All Reset
Resetting to the
factory status
Store
Execute/Cancel
Recall
Select “Execute” to store the setting values in an SxS memory
card.
Camera Data
Storing/recalling
the menu settings
Select “Execute” to retrieve the setting values from an SxS
memory card.
Execute/Cancel
UTC –12:00 to +14:00
Set the time-zone difference from UTC in steps of 30
minutes.
Time Zone
Setting the time
difference
Note
The default setting is different among the sales areas.
United States and Canada: –5:00
Europe area: 0:00
Oceania: +10:00
Date/Time
Set the current time and date.
Clock Set
Setting the built-in
clock
12H/24H
12H / 24H
Select the display mode of time.
12H: 12-hour mode
24H: 24-hour mode
Date Mode
YYMMDD / MMDDYY /
DDMMYY
Select the display mode of the date.
YYMMDD: In sequence of year, month, day
MMDDYY: In sequence of month, day, year
DDMMYY: In sequence of day, month, year
English / Chinese / Japanese
English: To display the messages in English
Chinese: To display the messages in Chinese
Japanese: To display the messages in Japanese
Language
Selecting the
language for
messages
Note
The “Japanese” is effective only on messages for warning
and caution. The menus and status indications do not change.
Setup Menu List
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
<1> Assign a function to the ASSIGN button of the corresponding
Off / Marker / Last Clip DEL / number.
ATW / Rec Review / Rec / The selectable functions are common.
Freeze Mix / Expanded Focus / Marker: For turning the markers on/off
Assign Button
Assigning
functions to the
assignable buttons
Spotlight / Backlight / IR
Remote / Shot Mark1 / Shot
Last Clip DEL: For deleting the last recorded clip
ATW: For turning ATW on/off
Mark2 / Fader / VF Mode / BRT Rec Review: For starting a Rec Review
Disp / Histogram / Lens Info Rec: For starting/stopping recording
Freeze Mix: For executing Freeze Mix
<2>
Expanded Focus: For turning Expanded Focus on/off
Off / Marker / Last Clip DEL /
ATW / Rec Review / Rec /
Freeze Mix / Expanded Focus /
Spotlight / Backlight / IR
Remote / Shot Mark1 / Shot
Mark2 / Fader / VF Mode /
BRT Disp / Histogram / Lens
Info
Spotlight: For selecting TLCS Spotlight mode
Backlight: For selecting TLCS Backlight mode
IR Remote: For activating/deactivating the IR Remote
Commander
Shot Mark1: For adding shot mark 1
Shot Mark2: For adding shot mark 2
Fader: For turning the Fader function on/off
VF Mode: For switching between color and monochrome
modes of the viewfinder
BRT Disp: For turning the brightness level indication on/off
Histogram: For turning the histogram indication on/off
Lens Info: For turning the depth-of-field indication on/off
Off: No function
<3>
Off / Marker / Last Clip DEL /
ATW / Rec Review / Rec /
Freeze Mix / Expanded Focus /
Spotlight / Backlight / IR
Remote / Shot Mark1 / Shot
Mark2 / Fader / VF Mode / BRT
Disp / Histogram / Lens Info
<4>
Off / Marker / Last Clip DEL /
ATW / Rec Review / Rec /
Freeze Mix / Expanded Focus /
Spotlight / Backlight / IR
Remote / Shot Mark1 / Shot
Mark2 / Fader / VF Mode / BRT
Disp / Histogram / Lens Info
Front
High / Low / Off
Set the brightness of the tally lamp on the front.
High: To brighten the lamp
Low: To dim the lamp
Tally
Setting the tally
lamps
Off: To not light the lamp
Rear
Turn the tally lamp on the rear on/off.
On / Off
Hours (Sys)
Hours (Reset)
The non-resettable accumulated time of use is displayed.
The resettable accumulated time of use is displayed.
Select “Execute” to reset the Hours (Reset) value to 0.
Hours Meter
Displaying the
hours meter
Reset
Execute/Cancel
On / Off
Set to “On” to activate remote control operations from the
supplied IR Remote Commander.
IR Remote
Activating/
deactivating the
Remote
Note
The setting automatically returns to “Off” when the
camcorder is turned off.
Commander
Setup Menu List
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Low BATT Set the battery level at which the Low BATT warning is
5% / 10% / 15% / ... / 45% /
Battery Alarm
Setting the low
power alarm
generated (in steps of 5%).
50%
BATT Empty
3% to 7% (3%)
Set the battery level at which the BATT Empty warning is
generated.
DC Low Volt1
11.5 V to 17.0 V (11.5 V)
Set the DC IN voltage at which the DC Low Volt1 warning is
generated.
DC Low Volt2
11.0 V to 14.0 V (11.0 V)
Set the DC IN voltage at which the DC Low Volt2 warning is
generated.
Type
The type (product name) is displayed.
The date of manufacture is displayed.
Battery INFO
Showing
information
regarding the
battery pack
(display only)
MFG Date
Charge Count
The accumulated number of times of charge/discharge is
displayed.
Capacity
Voltage
The estimated total capacity of full charge is displayed.
The current output voltage is displayed.
Remaining
The current remaining level is displayed.
24P System
60i / 24PsF
Select the synchronization mode and the output format when
the video format is HQ1080/24P. (Invalid with formats other
than HQ1080/24P.)
Genlock
Setting Genlock
operation
For details, see “Formats and Limitations of Outputs” on
GL H Phase
–999 to +999 (±0)
Set the H phase (phase of the horizontal sync signal) for
genlock operation.
H Advance
0H / 90H
Adjust the output phase with respect to the reference signal:
0H: The phase of the output signal is to match that of the
reference signal.
90H: When the reference signal is SD, the phase of HD
output is to advance 90H. (There will be no phase
difference between the reference signal and SD.)
When the reference signal is HD, the phase of SD output
delays 90H. (There will be no phase difference between
the reference signal and HD output.)
All / Part / Off
All: All Direct menu operations are permitted.
Part: A part of Direct menu operations is permitted. The
operation is limited depending on the GAIN, SHUTTER,
or WHITE BAL switch setting.
Direct Menu
Setting the Direct
menu function
Off: No Direct menu operation is permitted.
Enable / Disable
Enable: To use the i.LINK connector
i.LINK I/O
Disable: To not use the i.LINK connector
Setting for input/
output at the
i.LINK connector
Notes
• When you set this item to “Enable,” no signal is fed out
from the SDI OUT connector.
• When the video format is not SP mode, signal input/output
via the i.LINK connector is not enabled, even if this item is
set to “Enable.”
Setup Menu List
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Internal / Both / External
Internal: To activate recording start/stop operations only for
an SxS memory card in a built-in slot.
Trigger Mode
Setting whether to
trigger recording
start/stop for an
external device
connected to via
the i.LINK
Both: To activate recording start/stop operations both for an
SxS memory card in a built-in slot and the external
recording device connected via the i.LINK connector.
External: To activate recording start/stop operations only for
the external recording device connected via the i.LINK
connector.
connector
NTSC Area / PAL Area
Select the color system for the area where you will use the
camcorder.
Country
Setting the area for
use
Note
The default setting is different among the sales areas.
United States and Canada: NTSC
Other areas: PAL
Country: NTSC Area
HQ 1080/60i
SP 1080/60i
Select the video format (bit rate, picture size, frame rate, and
scan system in combination).
• Bit rate
Video Format
Selecting the video
format
HQ 1080/30P
HQ 1080/24P
SP 1080/24P
HQ 720/60P
HQ or SP
• Picture size
1080 or 720
• Frame rate
HQ 720/30P
HQ 720/24P
24, 25, 30, 50, or 60
• Scan system
Country: PAL Area
HQ 1080/50i
SP 1080/50i
i (interlace) or P (progressive)
Note
HQ 1080/25P
HQ 720/50P
HQ 720/25P
The default setting is different among the sales areas.
United States and Canada: HQ 1080/60i
Other areas: HQ 1080/50i
Title Prefix
nnn_
(nnn=least three digits of the
serial number)
Set the first 4-alphanumeric part of the clip names.
You can use upper- and lowercase alphabets, numerics 0 to 9,
- (hyphen), and _ (underscore).
Clip
Setting for clip
name or deletion
Number Set
000l to 9999
Set the second 4-numeric part of the clip name.
Update Media(A)/Media(B)
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to update the managerial file on the SxS
1)
memory card in the selected slot.
Last Clip DEL
Select “Execute” to delete the last recorded clip.
Execute / Cancel
All Clips DEL
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to delete all clips on the active SxS memory
card.
Note
Clips to which you applied OK mark cannot be deleted.
Select “Execute” to format the SxS memory card in slot A.
Media (A)
Execute / Cancel
Format Media
Formatting SxS
memory cards
Media (B)
Select “Execute” to format the SxS memory card in slot B.
Execute / Cancel
1)If clips cannot be played back, updating the
managerial file on the card may improve the
condition.
Setup Menu List
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting External Devices
Connecting External Monitors
To display recording/playback pictures on an
external monitor, select the output signal and use
an appropriate cable for the monitor to be
connected.
M
O
NIT
OR
THUMNAIL
VO
L
SE
L/SET
F
REV
PLA
Y/P
A
CAN
CE
US
L
PREV
E
F
F
WD
/
ST
OP
NEXT
ST
AR REC
T/ST
OP
H
O
L
F
F
HOLD
CH-2
IN
DIO
A
U
-1
MI
CH
C
+48V
MI
IC
M
E
LIN
V
C
+48
M
IC
E
LIN
R
E
LE
A
S
E
D
V
R
T
N
S
H
O
A
A
S
S
T
D
T
I
I
O
I
O
N
B
U
T
C
T
U
/
B -
T
I
D
/
U
R
T
A
O
I
N
G
E
N
T
L
O
C
IN
C
K
IN
T
C
O
U
T
R
E
M
O
T
E
LOCK
DC
M
IN
ON
OU
ITO
T
RELEASE
R
S
VID
EO
T
EN
N
T
PO
M
O
C
U
O
-
2
H
C
T
U
O
-
1
IO
D
H
C
AU
DC IN
MONIT
SDI OUT
OUT
OR
S
VIDEO
CH-1 CH-2 COMPONENT
AUDIO OUT OUT
SDI OUT
MONITOR
OUT
S VIDEO AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
OUT
75-ohm
coaxial cable
(optional)
Audio cable
(optional)
Component video
cable (supplied)
75-ohm
coaxial cable
S video
cable
(optional)
(optional)
SDI IN
MONITOR IN S VIDEO
AUDIO IN COMPONENT IN
Regardless of whether the signal is HD or SD, the
same status information and menus can be
displayed on the external monitor as those in the
viewfinder.
When outputting SD signals, select in advance the
output mode (Squeeze, Letterbox, or Edge Crop)
with “Down Converter” of the VIDEO SET
menu.
According to the signal fed to the monitor, set
“YPbPr/SDI Out Display” or “Video Out
“On.”
Note
SD signals down-converted for output have the
following restrictions:
Connecting External Monitors
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Images of 50P/50i/25P are output as PAL signals,
those of 59.94P/59.94i/29.97P are output as
NTSC signals, and those of 23.98P are output as
2-3 pulled-down NTSC signals.
To display the menus and status information on
the connected monitor
VIDEO SET menu to “On.”
SDI OUT connector (BNC type)
S VIDEO connector (S connector)
The connector is set at the factory to output an HD
SDI signal.
The connector outputs YC separate signals for
monitoring.
VIDEO SET menu, you can change the setting so
that it outputs an SD SDI signal. (The HD/SD
switching becomes valid also on the
COMPONENT OUT connector in
synchronization.)
Use a commercially available S video cable for
connection.
To display the menus and status information on
the connected monitor
VIDEO SET menu to “On.”
Use a commercially available 75-ohm coaxial
cable for connection.
AUDIO OUT CH1/CH2 connectors (RCA
phono jacks)
To display the menus and status information on
the connected monitor
The connectors output recording/playback audio
signals of the respective channels.
Use a commercially available audio cable for
connections.
VIDEO SET menu to “On.”
Note
If input/output at the i.LINK (HDV) connector
the SDI OUT connector.
COMPONENT OUT connector (mini-D
connector)
The connector is set at the factory to output HD
analog component signals for monitoring.
VIDEO SET menu, you can change the setting so
that it outputs down-converted analog component
signals for monitoring. (The HD/SD switching
becomes valid also on the SDI OUT connector in
synchronization.)
Use the supplied component video cable for
connection.
To display the menus and status information on
the connected monitor
VIDEO SET menu to “On.”
MONITOR OUT connector (BNC type)
The connector outputs down-converted SD
analog composite signals for monitoring.
Use a commercially available 75-ohm coaxial
cable for connection.
Connecting External Monitors
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To connect with a USB cable
When you connect the camcorder or the SBAC-
US10 SxS Memory Card USB Reader/Writer
(optional) using the supplied USB cable, the
memory card in the slot is acknowledged as an
extended drive by the computer.
When two memory cards are mounted in this
camcorder, they are acknowledged as two
independent extended drives by the computer.
Operating Clips With a
Computer
The clips recorded on SxS memory cards with
this camcorder can be controlled on a computer or
edited using the optional nonlinear editing
software.
For these purposes, the clips on an SxS memory
card can be operated by directly loading the card
in a computer or by connecting the camcorder or
the optional SBAC-US10 SxS Memory Card
USB Reader/Writer to the computer, using an
USB cable as shown below.
SxS memory card
SBAC-US10
(optional)
Preparations
USB cable
(supplied
with the
To use the ExpressCard slot of a computer
If the computer is equipped with an ExpressCard/
34 or ExpressCard/54 slot, you can directly insert
the SxS memory card containing clips recorded
with this camcorder and access to the files.
camcorder)
USB cable
(supplied with
SBAC-US10)
For the operating requirements for the computer, see
Note
The SxS Device Driver Software on the CD-
ROM supplied with the camcorder must be
installed on your computer. Before installation,
be sure to read the enclosed SxS Device Driver
Software End-User License Agreement.
Notes
• When connecting the USB cable to the
computer, be careful to check the form and
direction of the USB connector.
• The camcorder and the SBAC-US10 do not
work on the bus power from the computer.
Supply the operating power independently.
For information on installation of the driver, refer to
the ReadMe on the supplied CD-ROM.
For support information for the driver, visit the
following URL:
http://www.sony.net/SxS-Support/
To check the connection to the camcorder
to the
ExpressCard
slot
1
Turn the camcorder on by setting the
power switch to CAMERA or MEDIA.
A message prompting you to confirm that
you wish to enable the USB connection is
displayed in the viewfinder.
SxS memory card
Computer with SxS
Device Driver Software
installed
Connect USB Now?
Execute
With a Windows computer, check that a
Removable Disk appears in My Computer. This
indicates normal status.
C
ancel
With a Macintosh computer, an icon is displayed
on the menu bar.
Note
This message will not be displayed while
another confirmation message or in-progress
Operating Clips With a Computer
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
message (e.g., for formatting or restoration of
an SxS memory card) is shown on the screen.
It appears when formatting or restoration is
completed.
The message is also not displayed while the
CLIP INFO screen is shown on the screen. It
appears when an operation on the CLIP
INFO screen is completed or you return to
the thumbnail screen.
Macintosh
Drag the SxS memory card icon on the desktop to
Trash.
If the SxS memory card icon is located on Finder,
click on the eject icon on its side.
Note
Do not select “Card Power Off” from the SxS
memory card icon displayed on the menu bar.
2
3
Select “Execute” by operating the jog
dial or the joystick.
Using the XDCAM EX Clip Browsing
Software
The screen displays the following:
To copy clips to the local disk of a computer, the
XDCAM EX Clip Browsing Software must be
used.
Install the XDCAM EX Clip Browsing Software
on the supplied CD-ROM to your computer.
Although the data regarding recorded materials
are stored over multiple files and folders, you can
easily handle the clips without considering such
data and directory structure by using the XDCAM
EX Clip Browsing Software.
USB Connecting
With Windows, check that the memory
card is displayed as a removable disk in
My Computer.
With Macintosh, check that a “NO
NAME” or “Untitled” folder was
created on the desktop.
Note
If you operate, e.g. copy the clips on the SxS
memory card by using the Explorer (Windows) or
Finder (Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained
by the clips may not be maintained. To avoid such
a problem, use the XDCAM EX Clip Browsing
Software.
This indicates that the connection is active.
(The folder name on the desktop of the
Macintosh computer can be changed as
needed.)
refer to the User’s Guide contained in the CD-ROM.
Note
The following operations must be eliminated
when the access lamp is lit in red.
• Turning the power off or disconnecting the
power cord
For support information on the XDCAM EX Clip
Browsing Software, visit the web sites shown in
page of the supplied CD-ROM.
• Removing the SxS memory card
• Disconnecting the USB cable
Using a nonlinear editing system
When using the SBAC-US10, refer to the operating
instructions of the SBAC-US10.
For a nonlinear editing system, optional editing
software that corresponds to the recording
formats used with this camcorder is required.
Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of your
computer in advance, using the supplied
Removing an SxS memory card
Windows
XDCAM EX Clip Browsing Software.
Some editing software may not operate properly.
Be sure to confirm before use that it conforms to
the recording formats used with this camcorder.
1. Click on the icon of “Safely Remove
Hardware” on the task bar of the computer.
2. Select “Safely remove SxS Memory Card -
To use Final Cut Pro of Apple Inc.
It is necessary to convert the clips to files that can
be edited with the Final Cut Pro, using XDCAM
Transfer.
Drive(X:) from the displayed menu.
3. Check that the Safe To Remove Hardware
message appears then remove the card.
Operating Clips With a Computer
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For information on XDCAM Transfer, visit the web
sites shown in “XDCAM EX web sites” on page 15
or on the cover page of the supplied CD-ROM.
Connecting an External
Device (i.LINK
Connection)
When an HDV-compatible video format (SP
1080/60i, SP 1080/50i, or SP 1080/24P) is
selected, you can record the same images as those
recorded on the memory card in this camcorder
on an external device connected to the
i.LINK(HDV) connector, or record the playback
picture of the external device on the memory card
in the camcorder.
Nonlinear editing conforming to the HDV format
is also enabled.
Notes
• When you set i.LINK I/O” of the OTHERS
menu to “Enable,” no signal is output from the
SDI OUT connector.
• When the video format is not SP mode, signal
input/output via the i.LINK connector is not
enabled, even if “i.LINK I/O” is set to “Enable.”
• Use the i.LINK(HDV) connector only for one-
to-one i.LINK connection.
Recording the Camcorder Picture
on an External Device
When you set the camcorder to Camera mode, the
picture being shot with this camcorder is output as
an HDV stream via the i.LINK(HDV) connector.
It can be recorded on a connected HDV recorder
in synchronization with the REC START/STOP
operation on this camcorder.
1
Perform the preparatory settings of the
camcorder.
• Set the video format to SP 1080/60i, SP
1080/50i, or SP 1080/24P.
OTHERS menu to “Enable.”
OTHERS menu to “Both” or “External.”
Both: To record both on the memory card
in the camcorder and on the external device
External: To record only on the external
device
Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
135
such a signal using the nonlinear editing system,
a malfunction may occur, depending on the
nonlinear editing software in use.
• If you specify a search speed other than 4 or 15
times normal with the nonlinear editing system,
no i.LINK signal is fed out. In such a case, the
picture may stay frozen.
• High-speed playback picture may not be
displayed on the computer screen, depending on
the nonlinear editing software in use.
2
Set the external device to recording
standby status.
For operations of the external device, refer to
the operation manual of that device.
3
4
Set the camcorder to Camera mode by
setting the power switch to CAMERA.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
The external device starts recording in
synchronization.
Setting on this camcorder
Set “i.LINK I/O” of the OTHERS menu to
“Enable.”
The status of the external device is displayed in
viewfinder.
For operations of the nonlinear editing software,
refer to the operation manual of the software.
Indication
Status of the external device
In HDV recording standby
In HDV recording
STBY
HDV
Recording External Input Signals
zREC HDV
The HDV stream input from a device connected
via the i.LINK connector can be recorded on an
SxS memory card in this camcorder.
The timecodes superimposed on the i.LINK input
are recorded regardless of the settings of the
camcorder.
Notes
• Operation may be different depending on the
type of external device.
• Although there is some time lag from which you
press the REC START/STOP button until the
i.LINK status indication changes, the same
pictures are recorded on the memory card in this
camcorder and the external device if “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Both.”
• While you can record shot marks on the
memory card during recording, they are not
added to the pictures recorded on the external
device.
1
Set the external signal to a format that
can be recorded on the camcorder.
Signals of 1440 × 1080/59.94i can be
set to SP 1080/60i or SP 1080/24P. Signals of
1440 × 1080/50i can be recorded when set to
SP 1080/50i.
Recording is not allowed with other
combinations of “Video Format” and input
signals.
Nonlinear Editing
You can transfer an HDV stream to a nonlinear
editing system connected via the i.LINK(HDV)
connector.
2
OTHERS menu to “Enable.”
3
4
Set the camcorder to Media mode.
Notes
• The i.LINK(HDV) connector of this camcorder
is a 4-pin connector. Check the number of pins
of the i.LINK connector on your computer and
use an appropriate i.LINK cable.
• In searching pictures of this camcorder on the
computer, it may take some time until the
display is reflected on the computer.
• If the playback clip is short or the playback
starting point is near the end of the clip, the
i.LINK signal may be interrupted between the
clip and the next clip. When you try to capture
Press the STOP button to set the
camcorder to STOP mode.
The input image is displayed in the
viewfinder and the monitor connected via the
COMPONENT OUT connector or
MONITOR OUT connector.
The audio signal is output from the built-in
speaker (or headphones connected to the
headphone jack) and the monitor speakers
connected to the AUDIO OUT connectors.
Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection)
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Press the REC START/STOP button on
the handle.
About i.LINK
Recording begins.
Notes
• The REC START/STOP button on the grip does
not function.
• An error is generated in the following cases. In
such a case, cancel Recording mode by pressing
the REC START/STOP button.
This section explains the specifications and
features of i.LINK.
What is i.LINK?
—The video format of input signal does not
match that specified on the camcorder.
—A copy-protected stream is being fed in.
• If the input to the camcorder becomes no signal
during recording, the tally lamps and the
i.LINK zREC status indication in the
viewfinder flash, indicating that no signal is
being recorded on the SxS memory card.
When an input signal is resumed, recording is
restarted, incrementing the clip number on the
memory card.
i.LINK is a digital serial interface designed to
integrate devices equipped with i.LINK
connectors. i.LINK allows your device to:
• Perform two-way transmission and reception of
data such as digital audio and digital video
signals.
• Control other i.LINK devices.
• Easily connect multiple devices with a single
i.LINK cable.
Your i.LINK device is capable of connecting to a
wide range of digital AV devices for data transfer
and other operations.
Other advantages include the following feature.
When connected to multiple i.LINK devices,
your i.LINK device can perform data transfer and
other operations not only
with the directly connected devices but also with
any of the devices that are connected to those
devices. Therefore, you do not need to be
concerned with device connection order.
However, depending on the features and
specifications of the connected devices, you may
need to use certain functions differently, and you
may not be able to transfer data or perform certain
operations.
i.LINK, a nickname for IEEE 1394 proposed by
Sony, is a trademark supported by many
companies worldwide.
IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by
IEEE, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers, Inc.
Note
The camcorder can be connected to one device
with the i.LINK cable (DV cable). When you
connect with a device that has two or more
i.LINK connectors, refer to the
operating instructions supplied with the
connected device.
About i.LINK
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About data transfer speed of i.LINK
External Synchronization
i.LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed of
1)
approximately 100, 200 and 400 Mbps that are
described as S100, S200 and S400 respectively.
For i.LINK devices, a maximum data transfer
speed that the device supports is identified on
“Specifications” page of the operating
instructions supplied with the device or near its
i.LINK connector.
When multiple units of the PMW-EX3 are used in
the same shooting location, recording can be
made in synchronization with a specific reference
signal, and the timecode can be matched among
all the units.
1)When connecting with the device that support
different data transfer speed, the actual data transfer
speed may be different from those described on the
i.LINK connectors.
Aligning the phase of the video signal
(Genlock)
What is Mbps?
Genlock operation is enabled by supplying an SD
or HD reference signal to the GENLOCK IN
connector of the camcorder.
If the video format is set to HQ 1080/24P, select
the sync mode (60i or 24PsF) with “Genlock”
(page 129) of the OTHERS menu.
Mega bits per second. A measure of the rate at
which data is transmitted per second. In case of
100 Mbps, 100 Mega bits of data can be
transmitted per second.
i.LINK operation with your camcorder
The phase adjustment for the reference signal can
also be made with “Genlock” of the OTHERS
menu.
For details on operation when other equipment
with i.LINK (HDV) connector is connected, see
For details on connection with i.LINK cable and
necessary software, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with the connected device.
Notes
• If the reference signal is unstable, genlock is not
possible.
• The subcarrier is not synchronized.
About the required i.LINK cable
Synchronizing the timecode of your
camcorder with that of another unit
Use the Sony 6-pin-to-4-pin or 4-pin-to-4-pin
i.LINK cable (for HDV dubbing) to connect the
i.LINK devices.
The timecode of your camcorder can be locked to
that of another unit.
Set the unit that supplies the timecode to a mode
in which the timecode output keeps advancing
(Free Run or Clock mode).
i.LINK and
are trademarks.
1
Set “Timecode” of the TC/UB SET
menu as follows:
Mode: Preset
Run: Free Run
2
3
Press the TC/U-BIT/DURATION
button so that the timecode is displayed
on the screen.
Supply an HD or SD reference video
signal to the GENLOCK IN connector
and the reference timecode to the TC IN
connector.
External Synchronization
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138
To release the external timecode
synchronization
Change the “Timecode” setting of the TC/UB
SET menu or turn off the camcorder.
External synchronization is also released when
you start recording in a special recording mode
(Slow & Quick Motion, Frame Rec, or Interval
Rec).
TC
/U
-B
IT
/D
U
R
A
T
IO
N
SDI OUT
T
C
E
L
E
S
N
I
T
O
L
IN
S
T
LOCK
N
GE
X
E
GENLOCK IN
O
T
U
A
L
A
U
N
S
S
A
E
M
IO
D
C
C
U
A
A
B
-1
IN
H
C
O
N
I
I
D
A
U
IN
T
X
E
A
S
T
TC
C
E
L
E
I
O
D
E
U
O
T
A
L
U
A
E
V
L
A
L
U
N
A
M
TE
REMO
-
2
H
C
TC OUT
-EX3
W
PM
N
E
P
O
A
M
ER
A
O
F
F
M
E
D
IA
Synchronizing the timecode of another
unit with that of your camcorder
75-ohm coaxial
cables (optional)
TC IN
The timecode of another unit can be locked to that
of your camcorder.
Reference
video signal
Reference
timecode
1
Specify the timecode of your camcorder
with “Timecode” and “TC Format” (see
Thus the built-in timecode generator of your
camcorder locks to the reference timecode.
The message “EXT-LK” is displayed on the
screen.
2
Connect the TC OUT connector and
MONITOR OUT connector with the
timecode input and reference signal
input of the other unit, respectively.
T
STBY
TCG 00:00:00:00
HQ
1080/24P
H
L
O
F
F
EXT-LK
H
D
V
T
R
A
A
N
H
S
D
S
T
S
I
O
T
I
O
O
I
U
N
T
T
After about 10 seconds, you can disconnect the
external timecode without losing the
synchronization.
C
U
/
B -
T
I
B
D
/
U
R
A
T
O
I
N
G
E
N
T
L
O
C
I
C
K
N
I
N
T
C
O
U
T
TC OUT
R
E
M
O
T
E
Notes
DC
I
M
O
• Check that the reference timecode and the
reference video signal are in a phase relation
that complies the SMPTE timecode standards.
• When you finish the above procedure, the
timecode is immediately synchronized with the
external timecode, and the time data indication
will show the value of the external timecode.
However, wait for a few seconds until the
timecode generator stabilizes before recording.
• If the frequency of the reference video signal is
not the same as the frame frequency of the
camcorder, the camcorder cannot be correctly
genlocked. In such a case, the timecode is not
correctly synchronized with the external
timecode.
N
N
IT
T
O
R
OU
S
V
ID
E
O
T
N
E
N
T
O
U
P
M
O
C
O
-2
H
C
T
U
O
-1
IO
D
H
C
U
A
MONITOR
OUT
75-ohm coaxial
cables (optional)
To the timecode
input of the other
unit
To the reference video
input of the other unit
• When the connection is removed, the timecode
advance may shift one frame per hour with
respect to the reference timecode.
External Synchronization
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
—GAIN switch
—WHITE BAL switch
—SHUTTER switch
—BARS/CAM button
—WHT BAL button
Operating From the RM-
B750/B150
—FULL AUTO button
When the optional RM-B750 or RM-B150
Remote Control Unit is connected, various
settings of the camcorder can be performed from
the Remote Control Unit.
You can operate the menus of the camcorder and
monitor the picture on the RM-B750 or a video
monitor connected via the MONITOR connector
of the RM-B750/B150.
• Direct menu operation of the camcorder is
disabled when the Remote Control Unit is
connected.
• The ECS frequency value displayed on the
Remote Control Unit may slightly differ from
that on the camcorder.
Releasing Remote Control mode
Turn off the camcorder and disconnect the RM-
B750/B150.
The settings on the controls on the camcorder
become valid.
Connection
Using the remote cable (10 m) supplied with the
RM-B750/B150, connect between the REMOTE
connector of the camcorder and the camera
connector of the Remote Control Unit.
When you turn on the camcorder after the
connection, the camcorder enters Remote Control
mode.
Operating the Menus of the
Camcorder
In Remote Control mode,
(the icon for the
PP
Notes
Picture Profile menu) is displayed at the bottom
with the Setup menu icons, enabling you select
the Picture Profile menu from this screen.
• Use the RM-B750 of serial number 120000 or
higher.
• Pulling out the cheek pad may make
connection/disconnection of the remote cable
easier.
CA
MERA SET
A
uto BLK alance
B
B
B
B
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
Adjusting the camcorder from the
Remote Control Unit
00:00
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
S
lo
w
Shutter
Turn on the camcorder by setting the power
switch to the CAMERA position (Camera mode).
The Picture Profile function is activated,
automatically selecting Picture Profile 6.
From this status, you can control menu and
recording operations from the RM-B750/B150.
A
: Of f
PP
Note
The menu items that cannot be set in Remote
Control mode are shaded and cannot be selected.
For the functions that can be controlled from the
Remote Control Unit, see “Functions Operable
Operating the menu from the RM-B150
Set the camcorder to Camera mode by setting the
power switch to the CAMERA position in
advance.
Notes
• Remote Control operations cannot be made if
USB connection to the camcorder is enabled.
• Do not connect or disconnect the Remote
Control Unit when the camcorder is on.
• The following controls of the camcorder
becomes inoperative when the Remote Control
Unit is connected.
1
Set the DISPLAY switch to MENU.
The menu of the camcorder appears on the
monitor screen connected via the MONITOR
connector of the RM-B150.
Operating From the RM-B750/B150
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Select and set the menu items using the
MENU SELECT knob and the
CANCEL/ENTER switch.
C
C
A
olor
M
E
R
B
A SET
ar Type
B
B
B
F l i cker Reduce
oo peed
I n ter val Rec
Fra e Rec
S&Q Mot i on
ec eview
Z
m
S
B
B
B
When the settings are completed, set the
DISPLAY switch to ON or OFF to exit
the menu.
00:00
m
Set t ing
: Of f
R
R
:
3sec Fra e Rate : 30
m
PP
For details on operations of the RM-B150, refer to
the Operation Manual of the RM-B150.
2
Set “Setting” to “On.”
Operating the menu from the RM-B750
The camcorder enters Slow & Quick Motion
mode.
Set the camcorder to Camera mode by setting the
power switch to the CAMERA position in
advance.
3
4
Select the frame rate for recording with
“Frame Rate.”
1
Press and light the MONITOR button
then press the VF MENU button.
Press the VTR/START STOP button.
Slow & Quick Motion recording begins.
The menu of the camcorder appears on the
RM-B750 display and the monitor screen
connected via the MONITOR connector of
the RM-B750.
To stop recording
Press the VTR/START STOP button.
To cancel Slow & Quick Motion mode
Set “Setting” of “S&Q Motion” of the CAMERA
SET menu to “Off.”
2
3
Select and set the menu items, using the
MENU SELECT knob, ENTER button,
and CANCEL button.
When the settings are completed, press
the VF MENU button to exit the menu.
For details on operations of the RM-B750, refer to
the Operation Manual of the RM-B750.
Operating the Slow & Quick Motion
recording from the Remote Control Unit
When the Remote Control Unit is connected,
selection of “S&Q Motion” is enabled on the
CAMERA SET menu, and you can perform Slow
& Quick Motion recording from the Remote
Control Unit.
Before starting Slow & Quick Motion recording,
make the necessary settings on the menu.
1
Select “S&Q Motion” from the
CAMERA SET menu.
Operating From the RM-B750/B150
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Functions Operable From the RM-B750/B150 (Camera Mode)
When the camcorder is set to Camera mode, the
following functions can be made using the
controls, the switches, or the touch panel (RM-
B750) on the Remote Control Unit, in addition to
menu operations.
Function
Operation on the camcorder
Operation on Operation on
the RM-B150 the RM-B750
Menu ON/OFF
MENU button
yes
yes
yes
yes
Master gain selection
Gain adjustment
Step gain selection
GAIN switch
CAMERA SET menu c Gain Setup
yes
yes
yes
Color bar signal output ON/OFF CAM/BAR button
yes
yes
Shutter ON/OFF
SHUTTER switch + CAMERA SET menu
c Shutter
Shutter speed selection
ECS ON/OFF
CAMERA SET menu c Shutter
SHUTTER switch + CAMERA SET menu
c Shutter
yes
yes
yes
yes
ECS frequency selection
Auto white balance
CAMERA SET menu c Shutter
AUTO W BAL button
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Auto black balance
CAMERA SET menu c Auto BLK Balance
White R/B level adjustments
Black R/B level adjustments
White balance memory selection WHITE BAL switch
Auto Tracing White ON/OFF
Recording start/stop
Rec Review
Assignable button (with “ATW” assigned)
REC START/STOP button
REC REVIEW button
STOP button
Rec Review stop
1)
Call signal ON/OFF
1) When you press the CALL button on the RM-B750,
the message “CALL” is displayed in the viewfinder of
the camcorder.
Adjustments of the lens functions
When the supplied or optional exclusive lens is
used, the following functions can also be
controlled from the Remote Control Unit.
Function
Operation on the lens
Operation on Operation on
the RM-B150 the RM-B750
Iris adjustment
Iris close
Iris ring
yes
yes
yes
yes
Switching between auto iris and IRIS switch
manual iris
yes
Adjustments of the Picture Profiles
The Picture Profile menu of the camcorder can be
operated from the Remote Control Unit in the
same manner as on the camcorder. In addition,
some items of the Picture Profile menu can also
be adjusted by using the menus or controls of the
Remote Control Unit.
Operating From the RM-B750/B150
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For details on operations of the Remote Control
Unit, refer to the Operation Manual of the RM-B150/
B750.
displayed.
The changes becomes valid and reflected on the
Picture Profile menu.
• If the control knobs on the Remote Control Unit
is set to Absolute mode, the corresponding
items cannot be changed on the Picture Profile
menu.
Notes
• The following menu and knob/switch
operations on the Remote Control Unit are
enabled when the menu of the camcorder is not
Picture Profile item
Operation on the Operation on the
RM-B150
RM-B750
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Matrix
Setting
Level
R-G, R-B, G-R, G-B, B-R, B-G
Setting
Detail
Level
yes
Frequency
Crispening
H/V Ratio
White Limiter
Black Limiter
Knee APT Level
Setting
Skin Tone Detail
yes
yes
Level
Area Indication
Saturation
Phase
Width
Knee
Setting
Auto Knee
Point
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Slope
Knee SAT Level
Level
Gamma
Select
Black
yes
Black Gamma
Low Key SAT
Operating From the RM-B750/B150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
143
Appendixes
Important Notes on Operation
Use and Storage
Note about the battery terminal
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable
part.
Do not subject the unit to severe shocks
The internal mechanism may be damaged or the
body warped.
The unit may not operate properly if the pins of
the battery terminal are bent or deformed by
shock or vibrations, or if they become corroded
due to prolonged outdoor use.
Do not cover the unit while operating
Putting a cloth, for example, over the unit can
cause excessive internal heat build-up.
After use
If you notice bending, deformation, or surface
corrosion, contact your dealer or a Sony service
representative as soon as possible to have the
battery terminal replaced.
Always set the power switch to OFF.
Before storing the unit for a long period
Remove the battery pack.
Grip the handle when carrying
Grip the handle to carry. If you carry it by other
parts, such as the front micrphone block or the
viewfinder, the camcorder may drop, causing
injury.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep
the unit working properly and to prolong its
usable lifetime.
Contact your dealer or a Sony service
representative for more information about
inspection.
Do not leave the camcorder with the lenses
facing the sun
Direct sunlight can enter through the lenses, be
focused in the camcorder, and cause fire.
Use and storage locations
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or
storing the unit in the following places:
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature
range: 0ºC to 40ºC or 32ºF to 104ºF)
Remember that in summer in warm climates the
temperature inside a car with the windows
closed can easily exceed 50ºC (122ºF).
• In damp or dusty locations
Shipping
• Remove the memory cards before transporting
the unit.
• If sending the unit by truck, ship, air or other
transportation service, pack it in the shipping
carton of the unit.
• Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain
• Locations subject to violent vibration
• Near strong magnetic fields
• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing
strong electromagnetic fields.
Care of the unit
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lens
using a blower.
If the body of the unit is dirty, clean it with a soft,
dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth steeped in
a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry. Do not
use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinner, as
these may cause discoloration or other damage to
the finish of the unit.
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for
extended periods
To prevent electromagnetic interference from
portable communications devices
The use of portable telephones and other
communications devices near this unit can result
in malfunctions and interference with audio and
video signals.
In the event of operating problems
If you should experience problems with the unit,
contact your Sony dealer.
Important Notes on Operation
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is recommended that the portable
communications devices near this unit be
powered off.
About the LCD panels
The LCD panels are manufactured with
extremely high-precision technology that yields
effective pixel rates of 99.99% or higher.
However, very rarely, one or more
pixels may be permanently dark or permanently
lit in white, red, blue, or green.
This phenomenon is not a malfunction. Such
pixels have no effect on the recorded data, and the
unit may be used with confidence even if they are
present.
In such cases, set the Flicker-Reduction function
In some cases, such phenomena may not be
improved with the Flicker-Reduction function.
It is recommend to set the electronic shutter speed
1
1
to /
sec. in 50-Hz areas and to
/
in 60-Hz
100
60
areas.
Focal plane
Owing to the characteristics of the pickup
elements (CMOS sensors) for reading video
signals, subjects that quickly move across the
screen may appear slightly skewed.
The luminance at the top and bottom of the screen
may change when shooting a flashlight or a light
source that quickly flashes.
Phenomena specific to CMOS image
sensors
The following phenomena that may appear in
images are specific to CMOS (Complementary
Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensors.
They do not indicate malfunctions.
White flecks
Note on the viewfinder display
Although the CMOS image sensors are produced
with high-precision technologies, fine white
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare
cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc.
This is related to the principle of CMOS image
sensors and is not a malfunction.
Picture on the LCD screen in the viewfinder may
be distorted by the following operations:
• Changing the video format
• Rec Review
• Starting playback from the Thumbnail screen
• Reversing the viewfinder
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the
following cases:
• when operating at a high environmental
temperature
• when you have raised the master gain
(sensitivity)
• when operating in Slow-Shutter mode
Aliasing
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they
may appear jagged or flicker.
Flicker
If recording is made under lighting produced by
discharge tubes, such as fluorescent, sodium, or
mercury-vapor lamps, the screen may flicker,
colors may vary, or horizontal stripes may appear
distorted.
Important Notes on Operation
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
format shown below according to the video
format of the playback clip and the “YPbPr/SDI
Out Select” setting (HD or SD) of the VIDEO
SET menu.
The SDI OUT connector outputs serial digital
signals of the same format as that of the analog
component signals fed from the COMPONENT
OUT connector.
Formats and Limitations
of Outputs
Video Formats and Output
Formats
When the frame rate setting of the video format
is 59.94i/59.94P/29.97P/23.98P
The format of output signals from the
Clip format
Output format
COMPONENT OUT connector and the SDI
OUT connector varies according to the recording/
playback video formats and the kind of the output
signal (the setting of “YPbPr/SDI Out Select” of
the VIDEO SET menu).
YPbPr Out
YPbPr Out
Select: SD
480/59.94i
480/59.94i
480/59.94i
480/59.94i
480/59.94i
480/59.94i
Select: HD
1080/59.94i
1080/29.97PsF
1080/59.94i
720/59.94P
720/59.94P
720/59.94P
1080/59.94i
1080/29.97P
1080/23.98P
720/59.94P
720/29.97P
720/23.98P
1080/50i
1)
Output formats in E-E mode /recording
mode (Camera mode)
Analog component signals from the
1), 2)
1)
1080/59.94i
480/59.94i
COMPONENT OUT connector are output in the
format shown below according to the “Video
Format” setting of the OTHERS menu and the
“YPbPr/SDI Out Select” setting (HD or SD) of
the VIDEO SET menu.
The SDI OUT connector outputs serial digital
signals of the same format as that of the analog
component signals fed from the COMPONENT
OUT connector.
1080/25P
1080/29.97PsF1), 2) 480/59.94i1)
720/50P
720/59.94P1), 2)
480/59.94i1)
1), 2)
1)
720/25P
720/59.94P
480/59.94i
1)No signal is fed from the SDI OUT connector.
2)The actual frame rate of the output signal is 1.001
times of the value shown in the table. Some frame may
be repeated when converting the frame rate.
When the frame rate setting of the video format
is 50i/50P/25P
1)E-E mode: Recording standby status
Clip format
Output format
Video
format
Output format
YPbPr Out
Select: HD
1080/50i1), 2)
YPbPr Out
Select: SD
576/50i1)
YPbPr Out
Select: HD
1080/59.94i
YPbPr Out
Select: SD
480/59.94i
480/59.94i
480/59.94i
480/59.94i
480/59.94i
480/59.94i
576/50i
1080/59.94i
1080/29.97P
1080/23.98P
720/59.94P
720/29.97P
720/23.98P
1080/50i
1080/59.94i
1080/29.97P
1080/23.98P
720/59.94P
720/29.97P
720/23.98P
1080/50i
1), 2)
1)
1080/25PsF
1080/50i1), 2)
720/50P1), 2)
576/50i
1080/29.97PsF
576/50i1)
576/50i1)
1)
1080/59.94i
720/59.94P
720/59.94P
720/59.94P
1080/50i
1), 2)
1)
720/50P
576/50i
720/50P1), 2)
576/50i1)
576/50i
576/50i
576/50i
576/50i
1080/50i
1080/25P
1080/25PsF
720/50P
1080/25P
1080/25PsF
720/50P
576/50i
720/50P
720/50P
576/50i
720/25P
720/50P
720/25P
720/50P
576/50i
1)No signal is fed from the SDI OUT connector.
2)The actual frame rate of the output signal is 1/1.001 of
the value shown in the table. Some frame may be
deleted when converting the frame rate.
1)It becomes 1080/24PsF if “24P System” of “Genlock”
Output formats in clip playback mode
(Media mode)
Analog component signals from the
COMPONENT OUT connector are output in the
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limitations of Outputs
The outputs from the camcorder are limited by the VIDEO SET menu settings as follows. These
limitations are common to Camera mode and Media mode.
Menu settings i.LINK I/O
Enable
Disable
HD
Enable
SD
Disable
SD
Enable
Off
Disable
Off
YPbPr/SDI Out Select HD
Outputs from i.LINK(HDV)
HDV
No signal HDV
No signal HDV
No signal
the output
connectors
SDI OUT
No signal HD
No signal SD
No signal No signal
No signal No signal
COMPONENT OUT
MONITOR OUT
S VIDEO
HD
SD
SD
HD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
147
3
4
Adjust the white balance.
Lens File Operations
Press the MENU button to set the
camcorder to Menu mode and select the
LENS menu with
.
5
Select “Flare” and set the flare
compensation values for R, G, and B.
Up to 6 lens files can be used with this camcorder.
File ID
File
No.
Applicable lens
File name
LENS
A
uto FB ADJ
F i l e
F l a
hading
R Fla
G Fla
B Fla
R Fla
G Fla
B Fla
r
r
r
r
r
r
e
e
e
e
e
e
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
01
VCL-614B2X VCL-614B2X exclusive
standard zoom lens
B
B
B
r
e
(supplied)
00:00
S
EX
EX
EX
02
XS8X4AS-
XB8
Fujinon XS8X4AS-XB8
exclusive wide zoom lens
(optional)
U1
U2
U3
U4
User_File1
User_File2
User_File3
User_File4
User-definable
(Set the items with “EX” when a lens
extender is in use.)
6
Select “Shading” and set the shading
compensation values for each channel
(R, G, and B).
By storing the characteristics (compensation
data) specific to lenses in the files in the built-in
memory, the optimum compensation can be
easily made merely by retrieving the appropriate
file upon lens replacement.
First specify the channel (R, G, or B) with
“Shading CH” then set the values.
The optimum compensation data for the
exclusive lenses are stored in File 01 and File 02,
respectively, at the factory and are automatically
retrieved when the corresponding lenses are
mounted.
When using other lenses than the exclusive
lenses, you can store the compensation data in
Files U1 to U4 with the LENS menu.
LENS
A
uto FB ADJ
F i l e
F l a
hading
S
hading CH
:
:
:
:
:
:
R
0
0
0
0
0
B
B
B
M
H
H
V
V
V
MOD
r
e
SAW
PARA
SAW
00:00
S
PARA
(Set the items with “EX” when a lens
extender is in use.)
Storing compensation data for a non-
exclusive lens
7
When the adjustments are finished,
select “File.”
The same compensation data as those in the file
for the supplied standard lens (01: VCL-614B2X)
are stored in all the user-definable files U1 to U4.
When the mounted lens is a serial lens, the
corresponding lens ID is displayed in the
Lens ID column.
When the mounted lens is a non-serial lens,
“unknown” is displayed in the Lens ID
column.
To use a non-exclusive lens, store the
compensation data in a file by proceeding as
follows:
1
2
Mount a lens for which you wish to store
the compensation data in a file.
Set the camcorder to Camera mode by
setting the power switch to the
CAMERA position.
Lens File Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148
LENS
Backup Battery
YH
1
2
x
4
.
8
I
RS
A
F i l e
F l a
uto FB ADJ
Lens
I
D
D
B
B
B
B
B
R
S
ecal l
t ore
r
e
00:00
Shading
F i l e
I
:
U1: User_Fi le 1
N
o
O
ffset
ecal l :
A
uto
R
O
n
This camcorder uses a backup battery to retain
various setting data.
A lithium battery (CR2032) for backup is
mounted in the camcorder at the factory.
The backup battery retains the date, time, and
timecode in Free Run mode even when no
operating power is being supplied.
8
9
Select “Store” and specify the file in
which you wish to store the data.
LENS
A
uto FB ADJ
F i l e
F l a
hading
Lens
I
D
D
VCL-614B2X
XS8X4AS-XB8
B
B
B
B
B
R
S
ecal l
t ore
Service life of the backup battery
r
e
U
U
U
U
ser_Fi le 1
ser_Fi le 2
ser_Fi le 3
ser_Fi le 4
00:00
When the backup battery’s voltage falls, the
backup battery low-voltage warning appears in
the viewfinder.
If this warning appears, replace the battery as
soon as possible.
S
F i l e
I
:
No
O
ffset
ecal l :
A
uto
R
When the confirmation message is
displayed, select “Execute.”
WARNING
Battery may explode if mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, or dispose of in
fire.
If the lens is a serial lens, the corresponding lens
file is automatically retrieved when you next
mount the lens, as long as “Auto Recall” is set to
“On.”
If the lens is a non-serial lens or if “Auto Recall”
is set to “Off,” retrieve the corresponding file
with a menu operation (Recall) when you next
mount the lens.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
To change the file name
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey
the law in the relative area or country.
The initial file names (User_File1 to User_File4)
can be changed with “File ID” of the menu (up to
16 characters).
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement
incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement
avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type
équivalent recommandé par le constructeur.
Lorsque vous mettez la batterie au rebut, vous
devez respecter la législation en vigueur dans le
pays ou la région où vous vous trouvez.
To clear the compensation data
The compensation data of the current lens file can
be cleared to the factory-set values by selecting
“No Offset” from the menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
VORSICHT
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung falscher
Batterien. Batterien nur durch den vom Hersteller
empfohlenen oder einen gleichwertigen Typ
ersetzen.
Wenn Sie die Batterie entsorgen, müssen Sie die
Gesetze der jeweiligen Region und des jeweiligen
Landes befolgen.
Backup Battery
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing the backup battery
Notes
• Be sure to set the power switch to OFF when
replacing the backup battery.
• Be careful not to drop the removed screw into
the camcorder.
1
Open the cover of the backup battery
holder on the bottom by loosening the
screw, and remove the battery.
CR2025
V
3
2
3
Insert a new backup battery (CR2032)
with the + symbol on the battery facing
outside.
CR2025
3V
Attach the cover in the original position.
CR2025
3V
Backup Battery
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150
Troubleshooting
Operating Power
Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
The camcorder does not No battery pack is mounted and no Mount a battery pack (page 28) or connect an AC
power on when you set
power is supplied to the DC IN
the power switch either to connector.
CAMERA or MEDIA.
The battery pack is completely
Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one
exhausted.
The power supply cuts
while operating.
The battery pack becomes exhausted. Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one
The battery pack becomes The ambient temperature is very low. This owes to the battery characteristics and is not a
exhausted very quickly.
defect.
The battery pack is inadequately
charged.
If the battery pack is soon exhausted even after you
charged it fully, it may comes to the end of its life.
Replace it with a new one.
Recording/Playback
Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
Recording does not start The power switch is set to OFF or
when you press the REC MEDIA.
Set the power switch to CAMERA.
START/STOP button.
The SxS memory card is write-
protected.
card with a non-protected SxS memory card.
The SxS memory card is full.
Replace the card with one having sufficient space.
The SxS memory card needs
restoration.
Playback does not start
The power switch is set to OFF or
Set the power switch to MEDIA.
when you press the PLAY CAMERA.
button.
The supplied IR Remote Remote control operation is disabled. Enable remote control operation (page 41).
Commander does not
work.
The battery of the IR Remote
Commander is exhausted.
Replace the battery with a new one.
Audio recording is not
possible.
The AUDIO LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO
The recorded sound is
distorted.
The audio level is too high.
Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO
again.
The recorded sound has a The audio level is too low.
high noise level.
Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO
again.
Troubleshooting
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
External Devices
Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
The equipment connected It sometimes takes time for the
to the camcorder via an connected equipment to recognize
Wait for about 15 seconds. If the connected
equipment still does not react, do the following:
i.LINK connection does the operation.
not react as expected, for
example, no picture
•
Check the i.LINK cable, for example, by re-
plugging it.
• Turn the power off, and connect the cable again.
• Change the i.LINK cable.
appears on its screen.
Troubleshooting
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error/Warning Indications
The camcorder informs you of situations where
warning, caution, or an operation check is
required, through messages in the viewfinder, the
tally lamps, and a buzzer.
The buzzer is output to the built-in speaker or to
the headphones connected via the headphone
connector. The buzzer volume can be adjusted
with “Alarm Level” in “Audio Output” of the
AUDIO SET menu.
Error Indications
The camcorder stops operation after the following indications.
Error indication in Buzzer
the viewfinder
Tally
lamps
Cause and measures
E + Error code
Continuous Rapidly
flashing
The camcorder may be defective.
Turn off the power and consult Sony service personnel.
(If power cannot be turned off by setting the power switch to
OFF, remove both the battery pack and the DC IN source.)
Warning Indications
When one of the following indications is generated, follow the message to clear the problem.
Warning indication Buzzer
in the viewfinder
Tally
lamps
Cause and measures
Media Near Full
Intermittent Flashing
Free space on the SxS memory card has become insufficient.
Replace it with another at the earliest opportunity.
No space is left on the SxS memory card. Recording, clip
copying and clip division cannot be performed.
Replace it with another.
Media Full
Continuous Rapidly
flashing
Battery Near End
Battery End
Intermittent Flashing
The battery power will be exhausted soon.
Charge the battery pack at the earliest opportunity.
The battery pack is exhausted. Recording cannot be
performed.
Continuous Rapidly
flashing
Connect a power source via the DC IN connector or stop
operation to charge the battery pack.
The internal temperature has risen above a safe operation
limit.
Temperature High
Intermittent Flashing
Suspend operation, turn off the power, and wait until the
temperature falls.
Voltage Low
Intermittent Flashing
The DC IN voltage has become low (stage 1).
Check the power supply.
Insufficient Voltage
Continuous Rapidly
flashing
The DC IN voltage is too low (stage 2). Recording cannot be
performed.
Connect other power source.
Battery Error
An error was detected with the battery pack.
Replace the battery pack with a normal one.
The remaining power of the backup battery is insufficient.
Replace the battery with a new one.
Please Change Battery.
Backup Battery End
Please Change.
Error/Warning Indications
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning indication Buzzer
in the viewfinder
Tally
lamps
Cause and measures
1)
A partitioned memory card or one that contains recorded clips
exceeding the number permitted with this camcorder is loaded.
This card cannot be used with this camcorder. Remove it and
load a compatible card.
Unknown Media(A)
Please Change.
Media Error
An error occurred with the memory card. The card requires
restoration.
1)
Media(A) Needs to be
Remove the card, load it again, and restore it.
Restored
Media Error
Cannot Record to
Recording cannot be done, as the memory card is defective.
As playback may be possible, it is recommended to replace it
with another card after copying the clips, as required.
1)
Media(A)
Media Error
Neither recording nor playback can be done, as the memory
card is defective.
1)
Cannot Use Media(A)
It cannot be operated with this camcorder. Replace it with
another card.
Video Format Mismatch
The external signal input via the i.LINK connection cannot be
recorded, as the Video Format setting is different from the
signal format of the external input signal.
Change “Video Format” of the OTHERS menu to match it to
that of the external signal.
Copy Protected Input
Cannot Record
The external signal input via the i.LINK connection cannot be
recorded, as the stream is copy-protected.
Check the input signal.
Media Error
Playback Halted
An error occurred in reading data from the memory card, and
playback cannot be continued.
If this frequently occurs, change the memory card after
copying the clips, as required.
1)
Recording cannot be done, as an error occurred with the
memory card.
Media(A) Error
If this frequently occurs, change the memory card.
The battery power of the connected HDD will be exhausted
soon.
2)
Intermittent Flashing
HDD A Battery Near
End
Change the battery at the earliest opportunity.
2)
Continuous Rapidly
flashing
The battery of the connected HDD is exhausted. Recording
cannot be performed.
HDD A Battery End
Stop operation to change the battery.
1)(B) for the card in slot B
2)B for a HDD connected to slot B
Error/Warning Indications
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MPEG-2 Video Patent
Portfolio License
Specifications
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN
CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY
MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE
MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING
VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED
MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED
WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
General
Power requirements
DC 12 V
Power consumption
Approx. 13.5 W (Typical) (Recording)
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250
STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,
COLORADO 80206.
Peak inrush current
(1) Power ON, current probe method:
15 A (240V)
(2) Hot switching inrush current,
measured in accordance with
European standard EN55103-1:
62 A (230V)
“PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage
media storing MPEG-2 video information such as
DVD movie which are sold/distributed to general
consumers. Disc replicators or sellers of the
PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for
their own business from MPEG LA. Please
contact MPEG LA for any further information.
MPEG LA. L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206
http://www.mpegla.com
Operating temperature
0ºC to +40ºC (32ºF to 104ºF)
Storage temperature
–20ºC to +60ºC (–4ºF to 140ºF)
Recording/playback formats
Video
HQ mode: MPEG-2 MP@HL,
35 Mbps / VBR
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
SP mode: MPEG-2 MP@H-14,
25 Mbps /CBR
1440 × 1080 /59.94i, 50i
(23.98P is converted to 59.94i in 2-3
pull-down processing.)
Audio
LPCM (16 bits, 48 kHz, 2 channels)
Recording/playback time
With one SBP-8
SP mode: Approx. 35 min.
HQ mode: Approx. 25 min.
With one SBP-16
SP mode: Approx. 70 min.
HQ mode: Approx. 50 min.
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License / Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
155
With one SBP-32
Video S/N
54 dB (Y) (Typical)
SP mode: Approx. 140 min.
HQ mode: Approx. 100 min.
Horizontal resolution
1000TV lines or more (with HQ 1080,
Continuous operation time (recording)
With the BP-U60
HD SDI output)
Approx. 210 min.
Gain
With the BP-U30
–3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18 dB, AGC
Approx. 100 min.
Shutter speed
1
1
Mass
/
to
/
sec.
32
2000
Camcorder: 1.9 kg (4 lb 2 oz)
With the supplied lens, lens hood,
eyepiece, BP-U30 battery pack and one
SxS memory card: 3.6 kg (7 lb 15 oz)
Slow shutter
2 to 8 frames
EX Slow Shutter: 16, 32, 64 frames
Dimensions
Audio Block
Supplied accessories
Built-in microphones
Stereo electret condenser microphones
Directivity: Omnidirectional
Built-in speaker
Camera Block
Monaural
Output: 250 mW
Pickup device
1
/ -inch type, CMOS image sensor
2
Effective picture elements:
Viewfinder
1920 (H) × 1080 (V)
Screen size of the built-in LCD
Format
8.8 cm diagonal (3.5-inch)
3-chip RGB
Aspect ratio
Optical system
F1.6 prism system
16:9
Picture size
Lens mount
1/2-inch EX Mount, maximum rated
current 0.5 A
640 (H) × 3 (RGB) × 480 (V) delta
sequence
Transmission
Built-in filters
Hybrid (semi-transmissive) type
ND filters
OFF: Clear
1
1: / ND
8
Inputs/Outputs
Input connectors
1
2: / ND
64
Sensitivity
F10 (Typical) (With 1080/60i, 89.9%
reflection, 2000 lx)
GENLOCK IN connector
BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p, 75Ω,
unbalanced
Minimum illumination
0.14 lx (F1.9, +18 dB, 64-frame
accumulation)
TC IN connector
BNC type (1), 0.5 to 1.8 Vp-p, 10kΩ
Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors
XLR 3-pin (2), female
Zoom
Servo/Manual selectable
LINE: +4 dBu
Zoom ratio
MIC: –11 dBu to –65 dBu (6dB steps)
(Reference level: 0 dBu=0.775 Vrms)
14×
Maximum relative aperture
DC IN connector
1:1.9
DC jack (1)
Iris
Auto/Manual selectable
F1.9 to F16 and C (close)
Output connectors
SDI OUT connector
Focus
BNC type (1), conforming to
SMPTE292M/259M standards
Auto/Manual selectable
Ranges:
MONITOR OUT connector
BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p, 75Ω,
unbalanced
800 mm to ∞ (Macro OFF)
50 mm to ∞ (Macro ON, Wide)
735 mm to ∞ (Macro ON, Tele)
COMPONENT OUT connector
Mini D connector (1)
Picture stabilizing function
SteadyShot ON/OFF possible, shift-lens
system
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75Ω
Pb / Pr: 0.7 Vp-p, 75Ω
Filter thread
S VIDEO connector
M77 mm, pitch 0.75 mm
4-pin S connector (1)
Macro
TC OUT connector
ON/OFF switchable
BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p, 75Ω,
AUDIO OUT CH-1/CH-2 connectors
RCA phono jacks (2), –10 dBu (47kΩ
load, reference level)
Optional Accessories
Exclusive wide zoom lens
Fujinon XS8X4AS-XB8
Battery pack
BP-U30, BP-U60
Battery charger
Headphone connector
Stereo mini jack (1), –20.5 dBu
(reference level output, 16Ω load)
BC-U1, BC-U2
Computer connectors
SxS PRO memory card
SBP-8 (8 GB), SBP-16 (16 GB),
SBP-32 (32 GB)
SxS memory card USB reader/writer
SBAC-US10
i.LINK (HDV) connector
i.LINK, IEEE1394, 4-pin connector (1),
S400
Electret condenser microphone
ECM-673
Remote control unit
RM-B150, RM-B750
Professional hard disk unit
PHU-60K
USB connector
mini-B/USB2.0 Hi-Speed (1)
Supplied Lens (VCL-614B2X)
Focal length
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
5.8 mm to 81.2 mm
(equivalent to 31.4 mm to 439 mm on
35 mm lens)
Specifications
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dimensions
Unit: mm (inches)
16:9 WIDE SCREEN
SDI OUT
HDV
GENLOCK IN
REMOTE
INT
EXT
T
C
E
L
E
TC IN
S
O
T
AL
MANU
OT
AU
L
S
INT
EXT
Full
MF
STEADY
SHOT
AF
LENS INFO BRT DISP HISTOGRAM
ASSIGN
O
T
AL
MANU
AU
TC OUT
IRIS
1
2
3
3
X
E
-
ND
W
FILTER
M
MANU AUTO
MACRO
P
OPEN
2
1
-
+
FULL AUTO
FRAME
OFF ON
FOCUS
CLOSE
GAIN
L
WHITE BAL BARS/CAM
A
TW
B
A
OFF
M
H
P
AST
MANU AUTO
PUSH AF
PICTURE
PROFILE CAMERA OFF MEDIA
ST
A
TUS
MENU
SEL/SET
CANCEL
3
7
(
)
(
)
425 16 /4
250 9 /8
Notes
• Always make a test recording, and verify that
it was recorded successfully.
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION
OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF
FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS
RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER
MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO
RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
• Always verify that the unit is operating
properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF
PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS
DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT,
EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY
PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE
WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER
REASON WHATSOEVER.
Specifications
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|